ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION
EC
CONTENTS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................8
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................8
PRECAUTIONS .............................................................14
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............14
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine and A/T.........................................14
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System..................15
Precautions................................................................16
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................17
PREPARATION .............................................................18
Special Service Tools ................................................18
Commercial Service Tools.........................................18
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
SYSTEM.........................................................................20
Engine Control Component Parts Location...............20
Circuit Diagram..........................................................24
System Diagram........................................................25
Vacuum Hose Drawing..............................................26
System Chart.............................................................27
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...............................................28
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................28
Electronic Ignition (EI) System..................................30
Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................31
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed)........................................................................32
Evaporative Emission System...................................32
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)..........38
Positive Crankcase Ventilation..................................47
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE...................................49
Fuel Pressure Release..............................................49
Fuel Pressure Check.................................................49
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check................................50
Injector.......................................................................51
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..........52
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment.................................................................53
Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................66
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION...............................................................68
Introduction................................................................68
Two Trip Detection Logic...........................................68
Emission-related Diagnostic Information...................69
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................82
OBD System Operation Chart...................................83
CONSULT-II...............................................................89
Generic Scan Tool (GST)........................................103
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION................105
Introduction..............................................................105
Work Flow................................................................107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION.........109
Basic Inspection.......................................................109
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION.............................................................121
DTC Inspection Priority Chart..................................121
Fail-safe Chart.........................................................122
Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................123
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................127
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................130
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................132
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..140
Description...............................................................140
Testing Condition.....................................................140
Inspection Procedure...............................................140
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................141
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT.....................................................................144
Description...............................................................144
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................144
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........145
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................145
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)......152
Component Description...........................................152
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................152
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................152
Possible Cause........................................................153
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................153
Overall Function Check...........................................155
Wiring Diagram........................................................156
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................157
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR ........160
Component Description...........................................160
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................160
Possible Cause........................................................160
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................160
Wiring Diagram........................................................162
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................163
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR ......................................................................166
Component Description...........................................166
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................166
Possible Cause........................................................166
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................166
Wiring Diagram........................................................168
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................169
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT).......................................171
Component Description...........................................171
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................171
Possible Cause........................................................172
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................172
Wiring Diagram........................................................173
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................174
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........176
Description...............................................................176
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................176
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................177
Possible Cause........................................................177
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................177
Wiring Diagram........................................................181
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................182
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (ECTS).........................................................187
Description...............................................................187
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................187
Possible Cause........................................................188
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................188
Wiring Diagram........................................................189
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................190
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (CIRCUIT).....................................................192
Component Description...........................................192
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................192
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................192
Possible Cause........................................................193
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................193
Overall Function Check...........................................194
Wiring Diagram........................................................195
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................197
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING).....................202
Component Description...........................................202
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................202
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................202
Possible Cause........................................................203
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................203
Overall Function Check...........................................204
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................204
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING)......................210
Component Description...........................................210
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................210
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................210
Possible Cause........................................................211
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................211
Overall Function Check...........................................212
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................212
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING).......................218
Component Description...........................................218
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................218
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................218
Possible Cause........................................................219
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................219
Overall Function Check...........................................220
Wiring Diagram........................................................221
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................223
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)........................................231
Component Description...........................................231
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................231
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................231
Possible Cause........................................................232
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................232
Wiring Diagram........................................................233
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................235
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1
HEATER (FRONT).......................................................239
Description...............................................................239
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................239
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................239
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-2
Possible Cause........................................................239
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................240
Wiring Diagram........................................................241
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................243
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2
(REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)...................246
Component Description...........................................246
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................246
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................246
Possible Cause........................................................247
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................247
Overall Function Check...........................................247
Wiring Diagram........................................................249
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................251
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2
(REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) .................256
Component Description...........................................256
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................256
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................256
Possible Cause........................................................257
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................257
Overall Function Check...........................................257
Wiring Diagram........................................................259
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................261
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2
(REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING).........................266
Component Description...........................................266
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................266
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................266
Possible Cause........................................................267
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................267
Overall Function Check...........................................267
Wiring Diagram........................................................269
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................271
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2
(REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)..........................................276
Component Description...........................................276
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................276
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................276
Possible Cause........................................................277
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................277
Overall Function Check...........................................277
Wiring Diagram........................................................279
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................281
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2
HEATER (REAR).........................................................285
Description...............................................................285
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................285
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................285
Possible Cause........................................................285
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................286
Wiring Diagram........................................................287
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................289
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN).................292
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................292
Possible Cause........................................................292
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................292
Wiring Diagram........................................................294
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................296
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH)..................300
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................300
Possible Cause........................................................300
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................300
Wiring Diagram........................................................302
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................304
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE
SENSOR ......................................................................307
Component Description...........................................307
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................307
Possible Cause........................................................307
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................308
Wiring Diagram........................................................309
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................310
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE
ENRICHMENT PROTECTION.....................................312
System Description..................................................312
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................312
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................313
Possible Cause........................................................313
Overall Function Check...........................................313
Wiring Diagram........................................................316
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................318
Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................329
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER
MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE ...............330
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................330
Possible Cause........................................................330
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................331
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................331
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)...........................338
Component Description...........................................338
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................338
Possible Cause........................................................338
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................338
Wiring Diagram........................................................339
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-3
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................340
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (POS)..............................................................343
Component Description...........................................343
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................343
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................343
Possible Cause........................................................343
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................344
Wiring Diagram........................................................345
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................346
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CMPS) (PHASE).........................................................351
Component Description...........................................351
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................351
Possible Cause........................................................351
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................351
Wiring Diagram........................................................353
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................354
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE
WAY CATALYST FUNCTION.....................................357
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................357
Possible Cause........................................................357
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................358
Overall Function Check...........................................358
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................359
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL
LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)................................362
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................362
Possible Cause........................................................362
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................363
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................364
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT).................377
Description...............................................................377
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................377
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................378
Possible Cause........................................................378
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................378
Wiring Diagram........................................................379
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................380
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) ......383
Component Description...........................................383
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................383
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................383
Possible Cause........................................................383
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................384
Wiring Diagram........................................................385
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................386
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ..............390
Component Description...........................................390
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................390
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................390
Possible Cause........................................................390
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................391
Wiring Diagram........................................................392
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................393
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS
LEAK)...........................................................................402
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................402
Possible Cause........................................................402
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................403
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................404
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
(SLOSH).......................................................................415
Component Description...........................................415
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................415
Possible Cause........................................................415
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................415
Wiring Diagram........................................................416
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................417
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION.......419
Component Description...........................................419
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................419
Possible Cause........................................................419
Overall Function Check...........................................419
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT...........421
Component Description...........................................421
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................421
Possible Cause........................................................421
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................421
Wiring Diagram........................................................422
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................423
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) .........425
Component Description...........................................425
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................425
Possible Cause........................................................425
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................425
Overall Function Check...........................................426
Wiring Diagram........................................................427
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................428
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) -
AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ...............429
Description...............................................................429
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................430
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................430
Possible Cause........................................................430
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................430
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-4
Wiring Diagram........................................................432
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................433
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION
SWITCH .......................................................................438
Component Description...........................................438
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................438
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................438
Possible Cause........................................................438
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................439
Overall Function Check...........................................439
Wiring Diagram........................................................441
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................442
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE..................446
System Description..................................................446
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................446
Possible Cause........................................................446
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................446
Wiring Diagram........................................................447
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................448
DTC P0605 ECM .........................................................449
Component Description...........................................449
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................449
Possible Cause........................................................449
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................449
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................450
DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.....................451
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................451
Possible Cause........................................................451
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................451
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................452
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................453
Description...............................................................453
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................454
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................454
Possible Cause........................................................454
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................455
Wiring Diagram........................................................457
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................458
DTC P1148 (BANK 1), P1168 (BANK 2) CLOSED
LOOP CONTROL ........................................................476
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................476
Possible Cause........................................................476
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................476
Overall Function Check...........................................477
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................477
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
VACUUM CHECK SWITCH.........................................478
Component Description...........................................478
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................478
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................478
Possible Cause........................................................478
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................479
Wiring Diagram........................................................480
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................481
DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT .....................484
Description...............................................................484
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................484
Possible Cause........................................................484
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................484
Overall Function Check...........................................485
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................485
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE........486
Description...............................................................486
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................486
Possible Cause........................................................486
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................486
Wiring Diagram........................................................487
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................488
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
(OVERHEAT)...............................................................489
System Description..................................................489
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................489
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................490
Possible Cause........................................................490
Overall Function Check...........................................490
Wiring Diagram........................................................492
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................494
Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................505
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL...................................506
Component Description...........................................506
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................506
Possible Cause........................................................506
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................506
Wiring Diagram........................................................508
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................511
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (REF) ..............................................................517
Component Description...........................................517
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................517
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................517
Possible Cause........................................................518
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................518
Wiring Diagram........................................................519
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................520
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (POS) (COG)..................................................523
Component Description...........................................523
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-5
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................523
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................523
Possible Cause........................................................523
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................524
Wiring Diagram........................................................525
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................526
DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL
LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE) .................................531
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................531
Possible Cause........................................................531
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................532
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................532
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...................................533
Description...............................................................533
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................533
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................534
Possible Cause........................................................534
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................534
Wiring Diagram........................................................536
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................537
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE).........545
Component Description...........................................545
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................545
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................545
Possible Cause........................................................545
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................546
Wiring Diagram........................................................547
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................548
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW
MONITORING..............................................................553
System Description..................................................553
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................553
Possible Cause........................................................553
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................554
Overall Function Check...........................................554
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................556
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN)...........564
Component Description...........................................564
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................564
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................564
Possible Cause........................................................564
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................565
Overall Function Check...........................................566
Wiring Diagram........................................................567
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................568
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
(GROUND SIGNAL) ....................................................573
Component Description...........................................573
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................573
Possible Cause........................................................573
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................573
Wiring Diagram........................................................574
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................575
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS
VALVE (CIRCUIT)........................................................576
Description...............................................................576
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................576
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................576
Possible Cause........................................................577
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................577
Wiring Diagram........................................................578
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................579
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS
VALVE..........................................................................582
Description...............................................................582
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................582
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................582
Possible Cause........................................................583
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................583
Overall Function Check...........................................584
Wiring Diagram........................................................585
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................586
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION
LINE .............................................................................594
Component Description...........................................594
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................594
Possible Cause........................................................594
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................594
Wiring Diagram........................................................595
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................596
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
SWITCH .......................................................................597
Component Description...........................................597
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................597
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................597
Possible Cause........................................................597
DTC Confirmation Procedure..................................597
Overall Function Check...........................................598
Wiring Diagram........................................................599
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................600
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
(VIAS)...........................................................................602
Description...............................................................602
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-6
Wiring Diagram........................................................604
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................605
INJECTOR ...................................................................608
Component Description...........................................608
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................608
Wiring Diagram........................................................609
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................610
START SIGNAL...........................................................614
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................614
Wiring Diagram........................................................615
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................616
FUEL PUMP.................................................................618
System Description..................................................618
Component Description...........................................618
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................618
Wiring Diagram........................................................619
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................620
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT.......624
System Description..................................................624
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................624
Wiring Diagram........................................................625
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................626
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.........628
Component Description...........................................628
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................628
Wiring Diagram........................................................629
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................630
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR......................633
Description...............................................................633
Wiring Diagram........................................................634
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................635
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................637
Wiring Diagram........................................................637
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................639
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS............................643
Wiring Diagram........................................................643
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS).......644
Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................644
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................644
Mass Air Flow Sensor..............................................644
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor......................644
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (Front)................644
Fuel Pump ...............................................................644
IACV-AAC Valve ......................................................644
Injector.....................................................................644
Resistor....................................................................644
Throttle Position Sensor..........................................645
Calculated Load Value.............................................645
Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................645
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (Rear).................645
Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF)..........................645
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ...............................645
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE).......................645
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-7
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
NHEC0001
ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
NHEC0001S01
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1 Reference page
Unable to access ECM — EC-122
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 EC-160
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 EC-166
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-124
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-130
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-136
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-142
A/T COMM LINE P0600*2 EC-446
A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 EC-594
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 AT-156
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-108
CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 EC-523
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 EC-343
CKP SEN (REF)/CIRC P1335 EC-517
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 EC-476
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 EC-476
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 EC-438
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 EC-351
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 P0115 EC-171
*COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0125 EC-187
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 EC-330
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 EC-330
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 EC-330
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 EC-330
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 EC-330
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 EC-330
ECM P0605 EC-449
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-119
ENG OVER TEMP P0217 EC-312
ENG OVER TEMP P1217*2 EC-489
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 EC-402
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 EC-553
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0450 EC-390
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 EC-362
EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 EC-531
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
EC-8
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1 Reference page
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0464 EC-421
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P1464 EC-573
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 EC-419
FUEL LV SE (SLOSH) P0460 EC-415
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 EC-292
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 P0174 EC-292
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 EC-300
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 P0175 EC-300
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 EC-307
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 EC-192
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 EC-202
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 EC-210
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-218
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-231
HO2S1 (B2) P0150 EC-192
HO2S1 (B2) P0151 EC-202
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 EC-210
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 EC-218
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 EC-231
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 EC-239
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0155 EC-239
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 EC-246
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 EC-256
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-266
HO2S2 (B1) P0140 EC-276
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 EC-246
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 EC-256
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-266
HO2S2 (B2) P0160 EC-276
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 EC-285
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0161 EC-285
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 EC-429
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 EC-506
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325*2 EC-338
L/PRES SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-166
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 P0100 EC-152
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 EC-330
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-9
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1 Reference page
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615*2 EL-415
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000 —
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-191
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 EC-597
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-102
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 EC-377
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 EC-533
SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 P0750 AT-172
SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 P0755 AT-177
SWIRL CONT SOL/V P1130 EC-453
SWL CON VC SW/CIRC P1165 EC-478
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-151
TCS CIRC P1212*2 EC-486
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211*2 EC-484
THERMOSTAT FNCTN P1126 EC-451
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 P1705 AT-182
TRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 P0120 EC-176
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 EC-357
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 EC-357
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 EC-582
VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 EC-576
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 P0500 EC-425
VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4 P0720 AT-114
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 EC-383
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 EC-545
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 EC-564
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-10
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC
=NHEC0001S02
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Reference page
— Unable to access ECM EC-122
P0000
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
—
P0100 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 EC-152
P0105 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC EC-160
P0110 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-166
P0115 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 EC-171
P0120 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 EC-176
P0125 *COOLANT T SEN/CIRC EC-187
P0130 HO2S1 (B1) EC-192
P0131 HO2S1 (B1) EC-202
P0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-210
P0133 HO2S1 (B1) EC-218
P0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-231
P0135 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-239
P0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-246
P0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-256
P0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-266
P0140 HO2S2 (B1) EC-276
P0141 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-285
P0150 HO2S1 (B2) EC-192
P0151 HO2S1 (B2) EC-202
P0152 HO2S1 (B2) EC-210
P0153 HO2S1 (B2) EC-218
P0154 HO2S1 (B2) EC-231
P0155 HO2S1 HTR (B2) EC-239
P0157 HO2S2 (B2) EC-246
P0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-256
P0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-266
P0160 HO2S2 (B2) EC-276
P0161 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-285
P0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 EC-292
P0172 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 EC-300
P0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 EC-292
P0175 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 EC-300
P0180 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-307
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-11
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Reference page
P0217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-312
P0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-330
P0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-330
P0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-330
P0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-330
P0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-330
P0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE EC-330
P0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE EC-330
P0325*2 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-338
P0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-343
P0340 CMP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-351
P0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-357
P0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EC-357
P0440 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-362
P0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-377
P0446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-383
P0450 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-390
P0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-402
P0460 FUEL LV SE (SLOSH) EC-415
P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-419
P0464 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-421
P0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 EC-425
P0505 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC EC-429
P0510 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC EC-438
P0600*2 A/T COMM LINE EC-446
P0605 ECM EC-449
P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-102
P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-108
P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4 AT-114
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-119
P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-124
P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-130
P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-136
P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-142
P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-151
P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-156
P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-166
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-12
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Reference page
P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 AT-172
P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 AT-177
P1126 THERMOSTAT FNCTN EC-451
P1130 SWIRL CONT SOL/V EC-453
P1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-476
P1165 SWL CON VC SW/CIRC EC-478
P1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-476
P1211*2 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-484
P1212*2 TCS CIRC EC-486
P1217*2 ENG OVER TEMP EC-489
P1320 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-506
P1335 CKP SEN (REF)/CIRC EC-517
P1336 CKP SENSOR (COG) EC-523
P1440 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-531
P1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-533
P1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-545
P1447 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-553
P1448 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-564
P1464 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC EC-573
P1490 VC/V BYPASS/V EC-576
P1491 VC CUT/V BYPASS/V EC-582
P1605 A/T DIAG COMM LINE EC-594
P1610 - P1615*2 NATS MALFUNCTION EL-415
P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 AT-182
P1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-597
P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-191
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-13
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
NHEC0002
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to INFINITI I30 is as follows (The composition var-
ies according to optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring
harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized INFINITI dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified with yellow harness connector (and with
yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine and A/T
NHEC0003
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system,
etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EC-14
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
NHEC0004
SEF242XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
EC-15
SEF289H
Precautions
NHEC0005
I Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the
ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
SEF908W
I When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at left.
SEF291H
I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
MEF040D
I Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Ref-
erence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions
properly. Refer to EC-132.
SEF217U
I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall
Function Check” should be a good result if the repair is
completed.
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
EC-16
SEF348N
I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
I Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
SEF099W
I Regarding model A33, “B1” indicates the right bank and
“B2” indicates the left bank as shown in the figure.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
NHEC0006
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-10, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
EC-17
Special Service Tools
NHEC0007
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10117100
(J36471-A)
Front heated oxygen
sensor wrench
Rear heated oxygen
sensor wrench
NT379
Loosening or tightening front and rear heated oxy-
gen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
KV10117600
(J44321)
Fuel pressure check
adapter
NT777
Checking fuel pressure with pressure gauge
Commercial Service Tools
NHEC0008
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Leak detector
(J41416)
NT703
Locating the EVAP leak
EVAP service port
adapter
(J41413-OBD)
NT704
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
port
Hose clipper
NT720
Clamping the EVAP purge hose between the fuel
tank and EVAP canister applied to DTC P1440
[EVAP control system (small leak-positive pres-
sure)]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
EC-18
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Fuel filler cap adapter
NT653
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
Socket wrench
NT705
Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
NT778
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize
lubricant shown below.
a: J-43897-18 18 mm diameter, for Zirconia
Oxygen Sensor
b: J-43897-12 12 mm diameter, for Titania Oxy-
gen Sensor
Anti-seize lubricant
(Permatex
TM
133AR or
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907)
NT779
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
EC-19
Engine Control Component Parts Location
NHEC0009
SEF991Z
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location
EC-20
SEF992Z
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
EC-21
SEF993Z
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
EC-22
SEF814Y
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
EC-23
Circuit Diagram
NHEC0010
MEC359D
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
EC-24
System Diagram
NHEC0011
SEF994Z
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Diagram
EC-25
System Chart
NHEC0013
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)
I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Mass air flow sensor
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I Ignition switch
I Throttle position sensor
I Closed throttle position switch*3
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
I Air conditioner switch
I Knock sensor
I Intake air temperature sensor
I Absolute pressure sensor
I EVAP control system pressure sensor*1
I Battery voltage
I Power steering oil pressure switch
I Vehicle speed sensor
I Fuel tank temperature sensor*1
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)*2
I TCM (Transmission control module)
I Refrigerant pressure sensor
I ABS/TCS control unit
I Electrical load
I Fuel level sensor*1
Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Injectors
Electronic ignition system Power transistor
Idle air control system IACV-AAC valve
Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)
Swirl control valve control
Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
Power valve control VIAS control solenoid valve
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) con-
trol
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(front)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) control
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(rear)
EVAP canister purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
*1: These sensors are not used to control the engine system. They are used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*3: This switch will operate in place of the throttle position sensor to control EVAP parts if the sensor malfunctions.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Chart
EC-27
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0014
Input/Output Signal Chart
NHEC0014S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Fuel injec-
tion & mix-
ture ratio
control
Injectors
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Throttle valve idle position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Ignition switch Start signal
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage
Absolute pressure sensor Ambient air barometric pressure
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)* Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
ABS/TCS control unit TCS operation command
*: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System
NHEC0014S02
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
Various Fuel Injection Increase/Decrease Compensation
NHEC0014S03
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various oper-
ating conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine
I During acceleration
I Hot-engine operation
I When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D”
I High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
I During deceleration
I During high engine speed operation
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
EC-28
Mixture Ratio Feedback Control (Closed loop control)
NHEC0014S04
SEF336WA
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission con-
trol. The three way catalyst (Manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
a heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the
heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), refer to EC-192. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichio-
metric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is located downstream of the three way catalyst (Manifold). Even if the switch-
ing characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
Open Loop Control
NHEC0014S05
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
I Deceleration and acceleration
I High-load, high-speed operation
I Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) or its circuit
I Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) at low engine coolant temperature
I High engine coolant temperature
I During warm-up
I After shifting from “N” to “D”
I When starting the engine
Mixture Ratio Self-learning Control
NHEC0014S06
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front). This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio
as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily con-
trolled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and char-
acteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This
is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN
compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is
rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
EC-29
Fuel Injection Timing
NHEC0014S07
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
NHEC0014S0701
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
NHEC0014S0702
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
Fuel Shut-off
NHEC0014S08
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0015
Input/Output Signal Chart
NHEC0015S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Ignition
timing con-
trol
Power transistor
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Throttle valve idle position
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Ignition switch Start signal
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Battery Battery voltage
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
EC-30
System Description
NHEC0015S02
SEF742M
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of
the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Com-
puting this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored
in the ECM.
I At starting
I During warm-up
I At idle
I At low battery voltage
I During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0016
Input/Output Signal Chart
NHEC0016S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Air conditioner
cut control
Air conditioner relay
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation
System Description
NHEC0016S02
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
I When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
I When cranking the engine.
I At high engine speeds.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Electronic Ignition (EI) System (Cont’d)
EC-31
I When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
I When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
I When engine speed is excessively low.
I When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed)
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0017
Input/Output Signal Chart
NHEC0017S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Fuel cut
control
Injectors
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-28.
Evaporative Emission System
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0018
SEF569XA
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Air Conditioning Cut Control (Cont’d)
EC-32
operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is propor-
tionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
SEF396T
INSPECTION
NHEC0019
EVAP Canister
NHEC0019S01
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.
SEF397T
Tightening Torque
NHEC0019S02
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly between EVAP can-
ister and EVAP canister vent control valve.
SEF989X
SEF943S
Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve (Built into fuel filler cap)
NHEC0019S03
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm
2
, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm
2
, −0.87 to
−0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EC-33
Vacuum Cut Valve and Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve
NHEC0019S04
Refer to EC-582.
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume
Control Solenoid Valve
NHEC0019S05
Refer to EC-377.
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
NHEC0019S06
Refer to EC-307.
SEF462UA
Evap Service Port
NHEC0019S07
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the
EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system
occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak.
SEF200U
PEF838U
PEF917U
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
NHEC0019S08
CAUTION:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm
2
, 0.6 psi) of pressure
in EVAP system.
NOTE:
I Do not start engine.
I Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP
service port may cause a leak.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0019S0801
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
2) Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service
port adapter.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5) Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
6) Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7) Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
8) Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EC-34
SEF462UA
SEF254X
Without CONSULT-II
NHEC0019S0802
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
2) Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the
EVAP service port adapter.
3) Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both EVAP
canister vent control valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve
to make a closed EVAP system.
4) To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP sys-
tem until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014
to 0.028 kg/cm
2
, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
5) Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
6) Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EC-35
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
NHEC0020
SEF996Z
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EC-36
SEF253X
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EC-37
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)
NHEC0606
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NHEC0606S01
SEF206VA
SEF830X
From the beginning of refueling, the fuel tank pressure goes up. When the pressure reaches the setting value
of the refueling control valve (RCV) opening pressure, the RCV is opened. After RCV opens, the air and vapor
inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve, RCV and refueling vapor line to the EVAP
canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed
and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is
purged during driving.
The RCV is always closed during driving and the evaporative emission control system is operated the same
as conventional system.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
I Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
I Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
I Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO
2
fire extinguisher.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)
EC-38
CAUTION:
I Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
a) Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
b) Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to “Fuel Pressure Release”, EC-49.
c) Disconnect battery ground cable.
I Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
I Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
I Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
I After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
I Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NHEC0606S02
Symptom: Fuel Odor from EVAP Canister Is Strong.
NHEC0606S0201
1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 3.
No (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6.
No (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 7.
3 REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
© GO TO 4.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-39
4 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items2-4,replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace water separator.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.
© Repair or replace EVAP hose.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-40
6 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel
container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-41
7 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
8 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-42
Symptom: Cannot Refuel/Fuel Odor From The Fuel Filler Opening Is Strong While
Refueling.
NHEC0606S0202
1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © GO TO 6.
3 REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
© GO TO 4.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-43
4 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items2-4,replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace water separator.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.
© Repair or replace EVAP hose.
6 CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper
connection.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
7 CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check signal line and recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace filler neck tube.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-44
8 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 10.
NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
9 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel
container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-45
10 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
11 CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace fuel filler tube.
12 CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-46
13 CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close.
SEF665U
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
SEF372Q
SEF559A
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0021
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to con-
duct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold
sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any
blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the
crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose con-
necting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to
draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the
hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all
conditions.
SEC137A
INSPECTION
NHEC0022
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve
NHEC0022S01
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve ventilation hose
from PCV valve; if the valve is working properly, a hissing noise will
be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be
felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
EC-47
ET277
PCV Valve Ventilation Hose
NHEC0022S02
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Cont’d)
EC-48
SEF289X
SEF214Y
Fuel Pressure Release
NHEC0023
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0023S01
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF997Z
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
NHEC0023S02
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
SEF030Y
Fuel Pressure Check
NHEC0024
I When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
I Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
parts.
I Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
I Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
I Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operat-
ing. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Disconnect fuel tube joint between fuel pressure regurator and
injection tube and set fuel pressure check adapter (J44321).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Release
EC-49
SEF031Y
3. Install pressure gauge to the fuel pressure check adapter as
shown in the figure.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idling:
With vacuum hose connected
Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm
2
, 34 psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected
Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm
2
, 43 psi)
If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator
Check.
SEC015C
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check
NHEC0025
1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from vacuum gallery.
2. Plug vacuum gallery with a blind cap.
3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
SEF718BA
4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as
vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check (Cont’d)
EC-50
SEF702X
SEF703X
Injector
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NHEC0026
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-19, “TIMING
CHAIN”.
3. Remove fuel tube assemblies in numerical sequence as
shown in the figure at left.
4. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.
5. Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes.
I Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
I Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
6. Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pres-
sure regulator.
I Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
I Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools, fin-
ger nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings.
I Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
7. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.
I Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned
with cutouts of clips after installation.
SEF704XA
8. Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors.
Insert fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
9. After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that
fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors,
and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector
EC-51
SEF705X
10. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical
sequence (indicated in the figure at left) and in two stages.
: Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1st stage:
9.3 - 10.8 (1.0 - 1.1, 6.9 - 7.9)
2nd stage:
20.6 - 26.5 (2.1 - 2.7, 16 - 19)
11. Install all parts removed in reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and
fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
SEF058Y
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
NHEC0607
IDLE SPEED
NHEC0607S01
I Using CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF998Z
IGNITION TIMING
NHEC0607S02
Any of following two methods may be used.
I Method A
a) Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
b) Check ignition timing.
SEF247Q
I Method B
a) Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector (Cont’d)
EC-52
SEF248Q
SEF572X
b) Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to
this wire.
c) Check ignition timing.
SEF311Q
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment
NHEC0028
PREPARATION
NHEC0028S01
1) Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
I Battery
I Ignition system
I Engine oil and coolant levels
I Fuses
I ECM harness connector
I Vacuum hoses
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)
EC-53
I Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
I Fuel pressure
I Engine compression
I Throttle valve
I Evaporative emission system
2) On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is “OFF”.
3) On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while shift lever is in “N” position.
4) When measuring “CO” percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
5) Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger.
6) Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
7) Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-54
Overall Inspection Sequence
NHEC0028S0101
SEF554Y
NOTE:
If a vehicle contains a part which is operating outside of design specifications with no MIL illumination,
the part shall not be replaced prior to emission testing unless it is determined that the part has been
tampered with or abused in such a way that the diagnostic system cannot reasonably be expected to
detect the resulting malfunction.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-55
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
=NHEC0028S02
1 INSPECTION START
1. Visually check the following:
I Air cleaner clogging
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
I Electrical connectors
I Gasket
I Throttle valve and throttle position sensor operation
2. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
3. Open engine hood and run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
SEF977U
4. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
© GO TO 3.
3 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 4.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-56
4 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 5.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”.
2. GO TO 4.
5 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 6.
6 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
Replace IACV-AAC valve.
© GO TO 7.
7 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 8.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.
8 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 9.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-57
9 CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely
the case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-82.
© GO TO 4.
10 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
SEF572X
Ignition timing:
15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 11.
11 CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-29, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-58
12 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
SEF572X
Ignition timing:
15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 13.
13 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 14.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 13.
14 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
15 CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-82.
© GO TO 13.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-59
16 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
Check ignition timing again. Refer to Test No. 12.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.
17 CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-29, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 13.
18 ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-80 and AT-38, “HOW TO ERASE
DTC”.
With CONSULT-II © GO TO 19.
Without CONSULT-II © GO TO 20.
19 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
SEF999Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 23.
NG (Monitor does not
fluctuate.)
© GO TO 28.
NG (Monitor fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
© GO TO 21.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-60
20 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 2) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground.
3. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 23.
NG (Voltage does not
fluctuate.)
© GO TO 28.
NG (Voltage fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
© GO TO 21.
21 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 2).
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
6. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 2).
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground.
6. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 23.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 24.
NG © GO TO 22.
22 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
1. Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-50.
2. Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-152.
3. Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-608.
Clean or replace if necessary.
4. Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-187.
5. Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
© GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-61
23 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
SEF999Z
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG (Monitor does not
fluctuate.)
© GO TO 27.
NG (Monitor fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
© GO TO 25.
24 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 and ground.
2. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG (Voltage does not
fluctuate.)
© GO TO 27.
NG (Voltage fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
© GO TO 25.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-62
25 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1).
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
6. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1).
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 and ground.
6. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 26.
26 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-50.
I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-152.
I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-608.
Clean or replace if necessary.
I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-187.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
© GO TO 3.
27 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 1) HARNESS
1. Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1) harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 1) harness connector
terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-195.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 30.
NG © GO TO 28.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-63
28 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (BANK 2) HARNESS
1. Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 2) harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (bank 2) harness connector
terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-196.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 30.
NG © GO TO 29.
29 REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
© GO TO 3.
30 PREPARATION FOR “CO” % CHECK
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”.
SEF172Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
SEF982UA
© GO TO 31.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-64
31 CHECK “CO” %
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
SEF976U
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.
SEF978U
3. Check “CO” %.
Idle CO:3-11%
4.
Without CONSULT-II
After checking CO%,
a. Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor.
b. Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 32.
NG © GO TO 33.
32 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
6. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 or 62 and ground.
6. Make sure that voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 33.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-65
33 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Connect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connectors to heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-50.
I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-152.
I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-608.
Clean or replace if necessary.
I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-187.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
© GO TO 3.
SEF452Y
SEF454Y
SEF455Y
Idle Air Volume Learning
NHEC0642
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0642S01
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air vol-
ume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be
performed under any of the following conditions:
I Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced.
I Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PRE-CONDITIONING
NHEC0642S02
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of
the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are
missed for even a moment.
I Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
I Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99°C (158 - 210°F)
I PNP switch: ON
I Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting
switch to the 1st position to light only small lamps.
I Cooling fan motor: Not operating
I Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
I Vehicle speed: Stopped
I Transmission: Warmed-up
For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP
SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less
than 0.9V.
For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NHEC0642S03
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0642S0301
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITION-
ING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
7. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
8. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
If “INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
EC-66
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
SEC001C
Without CONSULT-II
NHEC0642S0302
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITION-
ING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown),
then reconnect it within 5 seconds.
8. Wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the
result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
NOTE:
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully,
proceed as follows:
1) Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2) Check PCV valve operation.
3) Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air
leakage.
4) Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory.
(Refer to Basic Inspection, EC-109.)
5) When the above three items check out OK, engine com-
ponent parts and their installation condition are question-
able. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFI-
CATION VALUE”, EC-140.
6) If any of the following conditions occur after the engine
has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and per-
form “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
I Engine stalls.
I Erroneous idle.
I Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
EC-67
Introduction
NHEC0029
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC 1st trip DTC
Freeze Frame
data
1st trip Freeze
Frame data
SRT code Test value
CONSULT-II X X X X X —
GST X X*1 X — X X
*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-122.)
Two Trip Detection Logic
NHEC0030
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
Items
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
Blinking Lighting up Blinking
Lighting
up
Coolant overtemperature enrich-
ment protection — DTC: P0217
— X ——X—X—
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 -
P0306 is being detected
X — — ———X—
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 -
P0306 is being detected
—— X ——X——
Closed loop control
— DTC: P1148, P1168
— X ——X—X—
Fail-safe items (Refer to EC-122.) — X — — X*1 — X*1 —
Except above — — — X — X X X
*1: Except “ECM”
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction
EC-68
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
NHEC0031
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
NHEC0031S01
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two con-
secutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and
2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL dur-
ing the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-80.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-78. These items are required by legal
regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously
are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-107. Then perform “DTC Confirmation Proce-
dure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item
requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NHEC0031S0101
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1320, P0705, P0750, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST does not indicate whether the malfunction
is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify
malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
SEF992X
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
NHEC0031S02
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed and absolute pressure at
the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
EC-69
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-93.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
1
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or
1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and
freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged
in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-80.
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
NHEC0031S03
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”,
use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM
memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MILis “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-70
SRT Item
=NHEC0031S0310
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indica-
tion)
Perfor-
mance Pri-
ority*2
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
Corresponding
DTC No.
CATALYST 3 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system (small leak) (negative pressure) P0440
— EVAP control system (small leak) (positive pressure) P1440*1
3 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P1447
HO2S 3 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (circuit) P0130, P0150
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (lean shift monitoring) P0131, P0151
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (rich shift monitoring) P0132, P0152
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (response monitoring) P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (high voltage) P0134, P0154
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (min. voltage monitoring) P0137, P0157
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (max. voltage monitoring) P0138, P0158
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (response monitoring) P0139, P0159
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) high voltage) P0140, P0160
HO2S HTR 3 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) P0135, P0155
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) P0141, P0161
*1: P1440 [EVAP control system(small leak) (positive pressure) diagnosis] isone type of SRT related diagnosis. This diagnosis, however,
does not contribute to setting the SRT as “CMPLT”, when no malfunction exists in the EVAP system. Therefore, P0440 must be used
instead of P1440.
*2: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-II.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-71
SRT Set Timing
=NHEC0031S0311
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done
regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is
shown in the table below.
Self-diagnosis result
Example
Diagnosis
Ignition cycle
+ ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON ,
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 ————
P1402 NG — NG
NG
(Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip)
DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC
(= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT
will indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indi-
cate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. , Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. , Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case1&2)ortwo(2)foroneofself-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary of each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
I The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
I The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
I When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diag-
nosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
I If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior
to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
NHEC0031S0312
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-72
SEF573XA
*1 EC-69 *2 EC-73 *3 EC-74
How to Display SRT Code
NHEC0031S0301
With CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
With GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown below.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is
complete and SRT is set.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-73
SEF935Z
How to Set SRT Code
NHEC0031S0302
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
With CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table
on EC-71.
Without CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-74
Driving Pattern
NHEC0031S0303
SEF947Y
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-75
I The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
− Sea level
− Flat road
− Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
− Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
I The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
I The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
I The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 92 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
I When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
I The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
I Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
I The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
I If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1) Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2) Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times.
I During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
SEF414S
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models
Set the selector lever in the “D” position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
NHEC0031S04
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-76
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (30 test
items).
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item
Test value (GST display)
Test limit Application
TID CID
CATALYST
Three way catalyst function
(Right bank)
01H 01H Max. X
Three way catalyst function
(Left bank)
03H 02H Max. X
EVAP SYSTEM
EVAP control system
(Small leak)
05H 03H Max. X
EVAP control system purge flow
monitoring
06H 83H Min. X
HO2S
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(bank 1)
09H 04H Max. X
0AH 84H Min. X
0BH 04H Max. X
0CH 04H Max. X
0DH 04H Max. X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(bank 2)
11H 05H Max. X
12H 85H Min. X
13H 05H Max. X
14H 05H Max. X
15H 05H Max. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
(bank 1)
19H 86H Min. X
1AH 86H Min. X
1BH 06H Max. X
1CH 06H Max. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
(bank 2)
21H 87H Min. X
22H 87H Min. X
23H 07H Max. X
24H 07H Max. X
HO2S HTR
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
(bank 1)
29H 08H Max. X
2AH 88H Min. X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
(bank 2)
2BH 09H Max. X
2CH 89H Min. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
(bank 1)
2DH 0AH Max. X
2EH 8AH Min. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
(bank 2)
2FH 0BH Max. X
30H 8BH Min. X
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-77
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
NHEC0031S05
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1 SRT code
Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000 ————
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 — — X EC-152
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 — — X EC-160
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 — — X EC-166
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 — — X EC-171
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 — — X EC-176
*COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 — — X EC-187
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 X X X*2 EC-192
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 X X X*2 EC-202
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 X X X*2 EC-210
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 X X X*2 EC-218
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 X X X*2 EC-231
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 X X X*2 EC-239
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 X X X*2 EC-246
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 X X X*2 EC-256
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 X X X*2 EC-266
HO2S2 (B1) P0140 X X X*2 EC-276
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 X X X*2 EC-285
HO2S1 (B2) P0150 X X X*2 EC-192
HO2S1 (B2) P0151 X X X*2 EC-202
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 X X X*2 EC-210
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 X X X*2 EC-218
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 X X X*2 EC-231
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0155 X X X*2 EC-239
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 X X X*2 EC-246
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 X X X*2 EC-256
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 X X X*2 EC-266
HO2S2 (B2) P0160 X X X*2 EC-276
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0161 X X X*2 EC-285
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 — — X EC-292
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 — — X EC-300
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 P0174 — — X EC-292
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 P0175 — — X EC-300
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 — — X EC-307
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-78
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1 SRT code
Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
ENG OVER TEMP P0217 — — X EC-312
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 — — X EC-330
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 — — X EC-330
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 — — X EC-330
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 — — X EC-330
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 — — X EC-330
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 — — X EC-330
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 — — X EC-330
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 — — — EC-338
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 — — X EC-343
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 — — X EC-351
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 X X X*2 EC-357
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 X X X*2 EC-357
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 X X X*2 EC-362
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 — — X EC-377
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 — — X EC-383
EVAPO SYS PRES SEN P0450 — — X EC-390
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 X X X*2 EC-402
FUEL LV SE (SLOSH) P0460 — — X EC-415
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 — — X EC-419
FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0464 — — X EC-421
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 — — X EC-425
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 — — X EC-429
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 — — X EC-438
A/T COMM LINE P0600 — — — EC-446
ECM P0605 — — X EC-449
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 — — X AT-102
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 — — X AT-108
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 — — X AT-114
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 — — X AT-119
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 — — X AT-124
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 — — X AT-130
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 — — X AT-136
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 — — X AT-142
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 — — X AT-151
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 — — X AT-156
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 — — X AT-166
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-79
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1 SRT code
Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 — — X AT-172
SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 — — X AT-177
THERMOSTAT FNCTN P1126 — — X EC-451
SWIRL CONT SOL/V P1130 — — X EC-453
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 — — X EC-476
SWL CON VC SW/CIRC P1165 — — X EC-478
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 — — X EC-476
TCS C/U FUN TN P1211 — — X EC-484
TCS CIRC P1212 — — X EC-486
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 — — X EC-489
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 — — X EC-506
CKP SEN (REF)/CIRC P1335 — — X EC-517
CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 — — X EC-523
EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 X X X*2 EC-531
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 — — X EC-533
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 — — X EC-545
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 X X X*2 EC-553
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 — — X EC-564
FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P1464 — — X EC-573
VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 — — X EC-576
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 — — X EC-582
A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 — — X EC-594
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 — — X AT-182
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 — — X EC-597
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 — — X AT-191
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These are not displayed with GST.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
NHEC0031S06
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
NHEC0031S0601
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-80
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
I If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased
individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
SEF823YC
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
How to Erase DTC ( With GST)
NHEC0031S0602
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.
I If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after approx.
24 hours.
I The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-81
7) Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
NHEC0031S08
SEF543X
I If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNC-
TION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with
CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to “IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)”
in EL section.
I Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
I When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) igni-
tion key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS)
initialization and IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0032
SEF217U
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MILwill light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
I If the MIL does not light up, refer to EL-167, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-643.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-82
On Board Diagnostic System Function
=NHEC0032S01
The on board diagnostic system has the following two functions.
Diagnostic Test
Mode
KEY and ENG.
Status
Function Explanation of Function
Mode I Ignition switch in
“ON” position
Engine stopped
BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine running
MALFUNCTION
WARNING
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
I Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection
I “Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)”
I “Closed loop control”
I Fail-safe mode
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check
NHEC0032S03
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to
EL-167, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-643.
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning
NHEC0032S04
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.
OFF No malfunction.
OBD System Operation Chart
NHEC0033
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
NHEC0033S01
I When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
I When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to “Two Trip Detection Logic” on
EC-68.
I The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
I The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driv-
ing pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”
mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
I The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
NHEC0033S02
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display)
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
EC-83
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear)
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-86.
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-88.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EC-84
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
=NHEC0033S03
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is
driven 3 times (pattern B) without
any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
the DTC and the freeze frame
data will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame
data will not be displayed any
longer after vehicle is driven 80
times (pattern C) without the same
malfunction. (The DTC and the
freeze frame data still remain in
ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected
for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
will be stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared
at the moment OK is detected.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
trip freeze frame data will be
cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EC-85
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NHEC0033S04
<Driving Pattern B>
NHEC0033S0401
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
NHEC0033S0402
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
I When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
I When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
I The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1).
I The C counter will be counted up when (1) is satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
I The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EC-86
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT
FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NHEC0033S05
SEF393S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is
driven 3 times (pattern B) without
any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
the DTC and the freeze frame
data will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame
data will not be displayed any
longer after vehicle is driven 40
times (pattern A) without the same
malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame
data still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected
for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
will be stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
without the same malfunction.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
trip freeze frame data will be
cleared.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EC-87
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NHEC0033S06
<Driving Pattern A>
NHEC0033S0601
AEC574
I The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
I The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
NHEC0033S0602
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EC-88
SEF289X
CONSULT-II
=NHEC0034
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NHEC0034S01
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector, which is located
under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover.
PBR455D
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Touch “START”.
SEF995X
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
SEF824Y
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II
EC-89
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL
SYSTEMS APPLICATION
NHEC0034S02
Item
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
WORK
SUP-
PORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DATA
MONI-
TOR
DATA
MONI-
TOR
(SPEC)
ACTIVE
TEST
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUP-
PORT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
INPUT
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
XXXX
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) X X X
Mass air flow sensor X X X
Engine coolant temperature sen-
sor
XXXXX
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) X X X X X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) X X X X X
Vehicle speed sensor XXXX
Throttle position sensor X X X
Fuel tank temperature sensor X X X X
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
XXX
Absolute pressure sensor X X X
Intake air temperature sensor X X X
Knock sensor X X
Ignition switch (start signal) X X
Closed throttle position switch X X X
Closed throttle position switch
(throttle position sensor signal)
XX
Air conditioner switch X X
Park/neutral position (PNP)
switch
XXX
Power steering oil pressure
switch
XX
Battery voltage X X
Ambient air temperature switch X X
Load signal X X
Swirl control valve control
vacuum check switch
XXX
Fuel level sensor X X X
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-90
Item
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
WORK
SUP-
PORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DATA
MONI-
TOR
DATA
MONI-
TOR
(SPEC)
ACTIVE
TEST
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUP-
PORT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
OUTPUT
Injectors X X X
Power transistor (Ignition timing)
X
(Ignition
signal)
XXX
IACV-AAC valve X X X X
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
X XXX X
Air conditioner relay X X
Fuel pump relay X X X X
Cooling fan X X X X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(front)
XXXX
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(rear)
XXXX
EVAP canister vent control valve X X X X
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve X X X X X
Swirl control valve control sole-
noid valve
X XXX
VIAS control solenoid valve X X X
Electronic controlled engine
mount
XXX
Calculated load value X X X
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-69.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-91
FUNCTION
=NHEC0034S03
Diagnostic test mode Function
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame
data can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (SPEC)
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
DTC confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Others
WORK SUPPORT MODE
NHEC0034S04
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ I FOLLOW THE BASIC INSPECTION IN THE SERVICE
MANUAL.
When adjusting the idle throttle
position.
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE I FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START”
DURING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure
from fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN I THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
When learning the idle air volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT I THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL
COEFFICIENT.
When releasing fuel pressure
from fuel line
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-92
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE OPEN THE VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE AND
CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
I IGN SW “ON”
I ENGINE NOT RUNNING
I AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
I NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP
SYSTEM
I TANK FUEL TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
I WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
I WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE,
CONSULT-II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY
APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DIS-
PLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE
BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
When detecting EVAP vapor leak
point of EVAP system
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
After adjustment, confirm target
ignition timing with a timing light.
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
NHEC0034S05
DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NHEC0034S0501
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”. (See EC-8.)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NHEC0034S0502
Freeze frame data
item*1
Description
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
I The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”.
(Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-8.)
FUEL SYS-B1*2
I “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
FUEL SYS-B2*2
CAL/LD VALUE [%] I The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
or [°F]
I The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%]
I “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
S-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%]
I “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
L-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
I The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-93
Freeze frame data
item*1
Description
VHCL SPEED [km/h]
or [mph]
I The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] I The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
I The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F]
I The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
*2: Regarding A33 model, “-B1” indicates right bank and “-B2” indicates left bank.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-94
DATA MONITOR MODE
=NHEC0034S06
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description Remarks
ENG SPEED [rpm] qq
I Indicates the engine speed computed
from the REF signal (120° signal) of the
crankshaft position sensor (REF).
CKPS·RPM (POS)
[rpm]
q
I Indicates the engine speed computed
from the POS signal (1° signal) of the
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
I Accuracy becomes poor if engine
speed drops below the idle rpm.
I If the signal is interrupted while the
engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
POS COUNT q
I Indicates the number of signal plate
(Flywheel/Drive Plate) cogs (tooth) dur-
ing one revolution of the engine.
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] qq
I The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor is displayed.
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
COOLAN TEMP/S
[°C] or [°F]
qq
I The engine coolant temperature (deter-
mined by the signal voltage of the
engine coolant temperature sensor) is
displayed.
I When the engine coolant temperature
sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-
ant temperature determined by the
ECM is displayed.
HO2S1 (B1) [V] qq
I The signal voltage of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) is displayed.
HO2S1 (B2) [V] qq
HO2S2 (B1) [V] qq
I The signal voltage of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) is displayed.
HO2S2 (B2) [V] qq
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
q
I Display of heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) signal during air-fuel ratio feed-
back control:
RICH ... means the mixture became
“rich”, and control is being affected
toward a leaner mixture.
LEAN ... means the mixture became
“lean”, and control is being affected
toward a rich mixture.
I After turning ON the ignition switch,
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mixture
ratio feedback control begins.
I When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
clamped, the value just before the
clamping is displayed continuously.
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN]
q
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
q
I Display of heated oxygen sensor 2
(rear) signal:
RICH ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
small.
LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
large.
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
HO2SW MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN]
q
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
qq
I The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed sensor signal is dis-
played.
BATTERY VOLT [V] qq
I The power supply voltage of ECM is
displayed.
THRTL POS SEN [V] qq
I The throttle position sensor signal volt-
age is displayed.
FUEL T/TMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
q
I The fuel temperature judged from the
tank fuel temperature sensor signal
voltage is displayed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-95
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description Remarks
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
qq
I The intake air temperature determined
by the signal voltage of the intake air
temperature sensor is indicated.
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
qq
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
starter signal.
I After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
played regardless of the starter signal.
CLSD THL/P SW
[ON/OFF]
q
I Indicates mechanical contact [ON/OFF]
condition of the closed throttle position
switch.
CLSD THL POS
[ON/OFF]
qq
I Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-
puted by ECM according to the throttle
position sensor signal.
AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF]
qq
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
conditioner switch as determined by the
air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
qq
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch sig-
nal.
PW/ST SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
qq
I [ON/OFF] condition of the power steer-
ing oil pressure switch determined by
the power steering oil pressure signal is
indicated.
AMB TEMP SW
[ON/OFF]
qq
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
ambient air temperature switch signal.
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF]
q
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
tion switch.
INJ PULSE-B1
[msec]
q
I Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according
to the input signals.
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
computed value is indicated.
INJ PULSE-B2
[msec]
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
q
I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board
correction.
q
IGN TIMING [BTDC] q
I Indicates the ignition timing computed
by ECM according to the input signals.
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
IACV-AAC/V [step] q
I Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control
value computed by ECM according to
the input signals.
PURG VOL C/V [%] q
I Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control
value computed by the ECM according
to the input signals.
I The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] q
I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio
feedback correction factor per cycle is
indicated.
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
I This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] q
EVAP SYS PRES [V] q
I The signal voltage of EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor is displayed.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-96
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description Remarks
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF]
q
I The air conditioner relay control condi-
tion (determined by ECM according to
the input signal) is indicated.
FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF]
q
I Indicates the fuel pump relay control
condition determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signals.
COOLING FAN
[ON/OFF]
q
I Indicates the control condition of the
cooling fan (determined by ECM
according to the input signal).
HIGH ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
VENT CONT/V
[ON/OFF]
I The control condition of the EVAP can-
ister vent control valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
I ON ... Closed
OFF ... Open
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
signals.
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
signals.
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
VC/V BYPASS/V
[ON/OFF]
I The control condition of the vacuum cut
valve bypass valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
I ON ... Open
OFF ... Closed
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
I “Calculated load value” indicates the
value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
ABSOL TH·P/S [%]
I “Absolute throttle position sensor” indi-
cates the throttle valve opening angle
computed by ECM according to the sig-
nal voltage of the throttle position sen-
sor.
MASS AIRFLOW
[g·m/s]
I Indicates the mass airflow computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of
the mass airflow sensor.
ABSOL PRES/SE [V] q
I The signal voltage of the absolute pres-
sure sensor is displayed.
SWRL CONT S/V
[ON/OFF]
I The control condition of the swirl con-
trol valve control solenoid valve (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
I ON ... Swirl control valve is closed.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is opened.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-97
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description Remarks
LOAD SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
qq
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal and/or lighting
switch.
ON ... rear defogger is operating and/or
lighting switch is on.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating
and lighting switch is not on.
TRVL AFTER MIL
[km] or [Mile]
I Distance traveled while MIL is activated
VIAS S/V
[ON/OFF]
q
I The control condition of the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indi-
cated.
I OFF ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
not operating.
ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
operating.
SWL CON VC SW q
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch.
ON ... Swirl control valve is not opera-
tional.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is opera-
tional.
ENGINE MOUNT
[IDLE/TRVL]
I The control condition of the electronic
controlled engine mount (computed by
ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
I IDLE ... Idle condition
I TRVL ... Driving condition
FUEL LEVEL SE [V] q
I The signal voltage of the fuel level sen-
sor is displayed.
IDL A/V LEAN
I Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed yet.
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has
not been performed successfully.
Voltage [V]
I Voltage measured by the voltage
probe.
Frequency
[msec] or [Hz] or [%]
I Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle
measured by the pulse probe.
I Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
be measured.
I Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an actual
piece of data which was just previously
measured.
NOTE:
I Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
I Regarding A33 model, “-B1” indicates right bank and “-B2” indicates left bank.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-98
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
NHEC0034S11
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description Remarks
ENG SPEED [rpm] qq
I Indicates the engine speed computed
from the REF signal (180° signal) of the
camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] qq
I The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor specification is displayed.
I When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
q
I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board
correction.
I When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
q
I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio
feedback correction factor per cycle is
indicated.
I When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
I This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
NHEC0034S07
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
FUEL INJECTION
I Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
I Change the amount of fuel injec-
tion using CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
I Harness and connector
I Fuel injectors
I Front heated oxygen sensor
IACV-AAC/V
OPENING
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
I Change the IACV-AAC valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
Engine speed changes according
to the opening percent.
I Harness and connector
I IACV-AAC valve
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
I Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
I Change the engine coolant tem-
perature using CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
I Harness and connector
I Engine coolant temperature sen-
sor
I Fuel injectors
IGNITION TIMING
I Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
I Timing light: Set
I Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
I Adjust initial ignition timing
POWER BAL-
ANCE
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
I A/C switch “OFF”
I Shift lever “N”
I Cut off each injector signal one
at a time using CONSULT-II.
Engine runs rough or dies.
I Harness and connector
I Compression
I Injectors
I Power transistor
I Spark plugs
I Ignition coils
COOLING FAN
I Ignition switch: ON
I Turn the cooling fan “ON” and
“OFF” using CONSULT-II.
Cooling fan moves and stops.
I Harness and connector
I Cooling fan motor
I Cooling fan relay
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
I Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
Fuel pump relay makes the operat-
ing sound.
I Harness and connector
I Fuel pump relay
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-99
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
PURG VOL
CONT/V
I Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
I Change the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
Engine speed changes according
to the opening percent.
I Harness and connector
I Solenoid valve
VENT
CONTROL/V
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
I Harness and connector
I Solenoid valve
VC/V BYPASS/V
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
I Harness and connector
I Solenoid valve
SWIRL CONT
SOL VALVE
I Ignition switch: ON
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis-
ten for operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
I Harness and connector
I Solenoid valve
VIAS SOL VALVE
I Ignition switch: ON
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis-
ten for operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
I Harness and connector
I Solenoid valve
ENGINE MOUNT-
ING
I Engine: After warming up, run
engine at idle speed.
I Gear position: “D”’ range
(Vehicle stopped)
I Turn electronic controlled engine
mount “IDLE” and “RAVEL” with
the CONSULT-II.
Body vibration changes according
to the electronic controlled engine
mount condition.
I Harness and connector
I Electronic controlled engine
mount
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
NHEC0034S08
SRT STATUS Mode
NHEC0034S0801
For details, refer to “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”,
EC-70.
SRT Work Support Mode
NHEC0034S0803
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT
while monitoring the SRT status.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-100
DTC Work Support Mode
NHEC0034S0802
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
EVAP SYSTEM
EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440
Refer to corresponding
trouble diagnosis for
DTC.
EC-362, 531
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-533
PURGE FLOW P1447 EC-553
VC CUT/V BP/V P1491 EC-582
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 EC-192
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 EC-202
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 EC-210
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-218
HO2S1 (B2) P0150 EC-192
HO2S1 (B2) P0151 EC-202
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 EC-210
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 EC-218
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 EC-246
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 EC-256
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-266
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 EC-246
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 EC-256
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-266
SEF705Y
SEF707X
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
(RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
NHEC0034S10
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by
touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
1) “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
I The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in
real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR”
in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detec-
tion is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%,
“REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched
on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME
DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2) “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
I DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-101
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1) “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunc-
tion at the moment it is detected.
I While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II
should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, espe-
cially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twist-
ing) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction
is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to
GI-25, “Incident Simulation Tests”.)
2) “MANU TRIG”
I If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR”
is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data
can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with
the value for the normal operating condition.
SEF720X
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-102
SEF139P
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
=NHEC0035
DESCRIPTION
NHEC0035S01
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978
has 8 different functions explained on the next page.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service
manual.
SEF289X
GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NHEC0035S02
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under
LH dash panel near the fuse box cover.
SEF398S
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF416S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service pro-
cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
EC-103
FUNCTION
NHEC0035S03
Diagnostic test mode Function
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog
inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA)
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM
during the freeze frame. [For details, refer to “Freeze Frame Data” (EC-93).]
MODE 3 DTCs
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
stored by ECM.
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
I Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
I Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
I Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
I Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
I Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
I Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS)
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS)
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving
conditions.
MODE 8 —
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch “ON” position (Engine stopped).
When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed.
I EVAP canister vent control valve open
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
I Low ambient temperature
I Low battery voltage
I Engine running
I Ignition switch “OFF”
I Low fuel temperature
I Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID)
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information
such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d)
EC-104
MEF036D
Introduction
NHEC0036
SEF233G
SEF234G
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no problems
such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with
the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-107.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur.A“Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example on next page should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
SEF907L
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
NHEC0036S01
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make
trouble-shooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MILto come on steadyor blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
I Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
I Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction
EC-105
Worksheet Sample
NHEC0036S0101
MTBL0017
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
EC-106
Work Flow
NHEC0037
SEF510ZG
*1 EC-122
*2 If time data of “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” is other than “0” or
“[1t]”, perform “TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT”, EC-144.
*3 If the incident cannot be verified,
perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-144.
*4 If the on board diagnostic system
cannot be performed, check main
power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-145.
*5 If malfunctioning part cannot be
detected, perform “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
*6 EC-75
*7 EC-140
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow
EC-107
DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW
NHEC0037S01
STEP DESCRIPTION
STEP I
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using
the “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-106.
STEP II
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC
and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-80.) The (1st trip) DTC and
the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-123.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
STEP III
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CON-
SULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
STEP IV
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read
the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The
(1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
STEP V
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-109.) If CONSULT-II is
available, perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNO-
SIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE”, EC-140. (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR/REPLACE”. Then
perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-123.)
STEP VI
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes.
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-127, 132.
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI-27, “Circuit
Inspection”.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-144.
STEP VII
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the
incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in
ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-80.)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow (Cont’d)
EC-108
Basic Inspection
NHEC0038
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied;
I Headlamp switch is OFF,
I Air conditioner switch is OFF,
I Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
1 INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
I Harness connectors for improper connections
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts
I Air cleaner clogging
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
SEF983U
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK THROTTLE DRUM OPERATION
Confirm that throttle drum is in contact with the stopper.
SEC016C
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection
EC-109
3 CHECK ACCELERATOR WIRE INSTALLATION
Check accelerator wire for slack.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Adjust accelerator wire. Refer to FE-3, “Adjusting Accelerator Wire”.
4 CHECK THROTTLE VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove intake air ducts.
2. Check throttle valve operation when moving throttle drum by hand.
OK or NG
OK © Retighten the throttle drum fixing nuts.
NG © Clean the throttle body and throttle valve.
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select ”CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal under the following conditions.
I Insert a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between stopper and throttle drum as
shown in the figure and check the signal.
SEC017C
SEF173Y
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “ON” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “OFF” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 6.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-110
6 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.
SEC017C
3. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches to “OFF”.
SEC018C
SEF305Y
© GO TO 7.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-111
7 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches from “OFF” to
“ON”, then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEC018C
2. Make sure two or three times that the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is closed and “OFF” when it is opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor.
6. Check the “CLSD THL/P SW” signal again.
The signal remains “OFF” while closing throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 6.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-112
8 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY
With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle posi-
tion memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Remove feeler gauge.
2. Start engine.
3. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
4. Select “CLSD THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF864V
7. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until “CLSD THL POS” signal changes to “ON”.
SEF061Y
© GO TO 13.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-113
9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEF711X
I Insert the 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between the stopper and throttle drum
as shown in the figure.
SEC017C
“Continuity should exist” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“Continuity should not exist” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 10.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-114
10 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.
SEC017C
3. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until continuity does not exist.
SEF711X
SEC018C
© GO TO 11.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-115
11 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
Without CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when the continuity comes to exist, then temporarily
tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEC018C
2. Make sure two or three times that the continuity exists when the throttle valve is closed and continuity does not exist
when it is opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the continuity does not exist when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor.
6. Check the continuity again.
Continuity does not exist while closing the throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 10.
12 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle posi-
tion memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Remove feeler gauge.
2. Reconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
3. Start engine.
4. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF864V
7. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, 20 times.
© GO TO 13.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-116
13 CHECK (1ST TRIP) DTC
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times.
3. Make sure no (1st trip) DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14.
14 REPAIR MALFUNCTION
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
© GO TO 13.
15 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 24.
NG © GO TO 16.
16 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 17.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”.
2. GO TO 16.
17 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 22.
NG © GO TO 18.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-117
18 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
Replace IACV-AAC valve.
© GO TO 19.
19 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 20.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 16.
20 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 22.
NG © GO TO 21.
21 CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely
the case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-82.
© GO TO 16.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-118
22 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
SEF572X
Ignition timing:
15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 30.
NG © GO TO 23.
23 CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-29, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 21.
NG © 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 16.
24 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
SEF572X
Ignition timing:
15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 30.
NG © GO TO 25.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-119
25 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 26.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 25.
26 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 28.
NG © GO TO 27.
27 CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-82.
© GO TO 25.
28 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
Check ignition timing again. Refer to Test No. 24.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 30.
NG © GO TO 29.
29 CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-29, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 27.
NG © 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 25.
30 ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-80 and AT-38, “HOW TO ERASE
DTC”.
© INSPECTION END
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-120
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
NHEC0039
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prior-
ity chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 I P0100 Mass air flow sensor
I P0110 Intake air temperature sensor
I P0115 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
I P0120 Throttle position sensor
I P0180 Fuel tank temperature sensor
I P0325 Knock sensor
I P0335 P1336 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I P0460 P0461 P0464 P1464 Fuel level sensor
I P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
I P0605 ECM
I P1126 Thermostat function
I P1320 Ignition signal
I P1335 Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I P1605 A/T diagnosis communication line
I P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
2 I P0105 Absolute pressure sensor
I P0130-P0134, P0150-P0154 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I P0135 P0155 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
I P0137-P0140, P0157-P0160 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
I P0141 P0161 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
I P0217 Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection
I P0443 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
I P0446 P1446 P1448 EVAP canister vent control valve
I P0450 EVAP control system pressure sensor
I P0510 Closed throttle position switch
I P0705-P0755 P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
I P1165 Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
I P1447 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
I P1490 P1491 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
3 I P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
I P0306 - P0300 Misfire
I P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
I P0440 P1440 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK)
I P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
I P0505 IACV-AAC valve
I P0600 A/T communication line
I P0731-P0734 P0744 A/T function
I P1130 Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
I P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
EC-121
Fail-safe Chart
=NHEC0040
The ECM enters fail-safe mode, if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short cir-
cuit. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0100 Mass air flow sensor cir-
cuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0115 Engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turn-
ing ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
ON or Start
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after
ignition ON or Start
80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
P0120 Throttle position sensor
circuit
Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the
engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P1335 Crankshaft position sensor
(REF) circuit
Compression TDC signal (120° signal) is controlled by camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) signal and crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal. Ignition timing will be
delayed 0° to 2°.
Unable to
access ECM
ECM ECM fail-safe activating condition
The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning.
When the fail-safe system activates (i.e., if the ECM detects a malfunction condition
in the CPU of ECM), the MIL on the instrument panel lights to warn the driver.
However it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed.
Engine control with fail-safe
When ECM fail-safe is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel pump operation,
IACV-AAC valve operation and cooling fan operation are controlled under certain
limitations.
ECM fail-safe operation
Engine speed
Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000
rpm
Fuel injection Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
Ignition timing Ignition timing is fixed at the preset valve
Fuel pump
Fuel pump relay is “ON” when engine is running
and “OFF” when engine stalls
IACV-AAC valve Full open
Cooling fans
Cooling fan relay “ON” (High speed condition)
when engine is running, and “OFF” when engine
stalls.
Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Fail-safe Chart
EC-122
Symptom Matrix Chart
NHEC0041
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
NHEC0041S01
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 11232 2 2 3 2EC-618
Fuel pressure regulator system 3344444 4 4 4 EC-50
Injector circuit 11232 2 2 2 EC-608
Evaporative emission system
33
44444 4 4 4
EC-32
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem
1 EC-47
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-109
IACV-AAC valve circuit 1123322 2 2 2 2EC-429
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 33111 1 1 1 EC-109
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-506
Main power supply and ground circuit
22333 3 3
2
3
EC-145
Air conditioner circuit 3 3 2 HA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart
EC-123
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Engine
control
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
circuit
22
EC-517
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
circuit
EC-343, 523
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) circuit
3
EC-351
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1
12
2
222 2
EC-152
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
circuit
3
EC-192
Engine coolant temperature sen-
sor circuit
1 3 3 EC-171, 187
Throttle position sensor circuit 2 2 EC-176
Incorrect throttle position sensor
adjustment
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-109
Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3
3
EC-425
Knock sensor circuit 2 EC-338
ECM 2233333 3 33 EC-449, 122
Start signal circuit 2 EC-614
Park/Neutral position switch circuit 3 3
33
3 EC-597
Power steering oil pressure switch
circuit
2 EC-628
Electronic controlled engine mount
control circuit
EC-624
Electrical load signal circuit EC-637
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
EC-124
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
NHEC0041S02
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel tank
5
5
FE section
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Vapor lock
Valve deposit
5 555 5 5 5
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline,
Low octane)
Air Air duct
55555 5
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — throttle
body)
555 5
Throttle body, Throttle wire FE section
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
—
Cranking Battery
111111 11
EL sectionAlternator circuit
Starter circuit 3
Drive plate 6 EM section
PNP switch 4 AT section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
EC-125
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Engine Cylinder head
55555 5 5 5
EM section
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
66666 6 6 6
4Piston
Piston ring
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve
mechanism
Timing chain
55555 5 5 5
Camshaft
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket
5555555 5 FEsection
Three way catalyst
Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery
55555 5 5 5
MA, EM, LC
section
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LC section
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
55555 5 5 45
Thermostat 5
Water pump
Water gallery
Cooling fan 5 EC section
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
coolant
MA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
EC-126
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)
11
EC-82 or EL
section
ABS/TCS control unit
22222
EC-484,
EC-486 or BR
section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0042
Remarks:
I Specification data are reference values.
I Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
I If the real-time diagnosis results are NG and the on board diagnostic system results are OK when diagnosing the mass air flow sensor,
first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED
CKPS·RPM (POS)
I Tachometer: Connect
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
Almost the same speed as
the CONSULT-II value.
POS COUNT I Engine: Running 179 - 181
MAS A/F SE-B1
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.2V
COOLAN TEMP/S I Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
EC-127
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 (B1)
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
LEAN +, RICH
VHCL SPEED SE
I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON-
SULT-II value
Almost the same speed as
the CONSULT-II value
BATTERY VOLT I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
THRTL POS SEN
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF
CLSD THL POS
CLSD THL/P SW
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: Idle position ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
AIR COND SIG
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: “OFF” OFF
Air conditioner switch: “ON”
(Compressor operates.)
ON
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON
Except above OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Steering wheel in neutral position
(forward direction)
OFF
The steering wheel is turned ON
AMB TEMP SW
I Ignition switch: ON
I Compare ambient air tempera-
ture with the following:
Below 19°C (66°F) OFF
Above 25°C (77°F) ON
IGNITION SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF , ON ON , OFF , ON
INJ PULSE-B2
INJ PULSE-B1
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 2.0 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm 1.4 - 2.6 msec
IGN TIMING
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 15° BTDC
2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC
IACV-AAC/V
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 2 - 10 step
2,000 rpm —
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
EC-128
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PURG VOL C/V
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 0%
2,000 rpm —
A/F ALPHA-B2
A/F ALPHA-B1
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
54 - 155%
EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V
AIR COND RLY I Air conditioner switch: OFF , ON OFF , ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds)
I Engine running and cranking
ON
Except as shown above OFF
COOLING FAN
I After warming up engine, idle
the engine.
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C
(219°F)
Low
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
(221°F) or more
HIGH
VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm [After driving for 2 minutes at a speed
of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more]
ON
VC/V BYPASS/V Ignition switch: ON OFF
CAL/LD VALUE
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0%
ABSOL TH·P/S
I Engine: After warming up Throttle valve: fully closed 0.00%
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80.0%
MASS AIRFLOW
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
ABSOL PRES/SE I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 4.4V
SWRL CONT S/V I Engine speed: Idle
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F).
ON
Engine coolant temperature is above
50°C (122°F).
OFF
SWL CON VC SW
I Engine speed: Idle
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C (122°F).
OFF
I Engine speed: Idle
I Engine coolant temperature is between 55°C (131°F).
ON
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
EC-129
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENGINE MOUNT I Engine: Running
Idle “IDLE”
2,000 rpm “TRVL”
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0043
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH·P/S, CLSD THL/P SW
NHEC0043S01
Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH·P/S” and “CLSD THL/P SW” when depressing the
accelerator pedal with the ignition switch “ON”.
The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or
rise after “CLSD THL/P SW” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
SEF240Y
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL POS SEN, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
NHEC0043S02
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MASA/F SE-B1”, “THRTL POS SEN”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and
“INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine suffi-
ciently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
SEF241Y
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
EC-130
SEF242YA
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
EC-131
SEC004C
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NHEC0044
PREPARATION
NHEC0044S01
1. ECM is located behind the instrument lower cover. For this
inspection, remove instrument lower cover.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
MEC486B
3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con-
nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
I Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
I Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
I Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
NHEC0044S02
SEF970W
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
NHEC0044S03
Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
EC-132
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
1 PU/R
EVAP canister purge
volume control sole-
noid valve
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
SEF994U
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
SEF995U
2 R/L
Heated oxygen sensor
1 heater (front) (bank
2)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
3 OR/L
Heated oxygen sensor
1 heater (front) (bank
1)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
4 R/L
Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear) (bank
2)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
(43 MPH) or more.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
5 P/B
Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear) (bank
1)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
(43 MPH) or more.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
6
7
8
17
W/PU
Y/B
Y
GY/L
IACV-AAC valve
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
0.1 - 14V
16 Y/G
VIAS control solenoid
valve
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-133
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
21
22
23
30
31
32
Y/R
G/R
L/R
GY
PU/W
GY/R
Ignition signal No. 1
Ignition signal No. 2
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 6
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
0 - 0.2V★
SEF399T
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
0.1 - 0.3V★
SEF645T
25 W/G Tachometer
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
10-11V★
SEF579X
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
10-11V★
SEF580X
26 W/B
ECM relay
(Self shutt-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
I For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
“OFF”
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
I A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
27 B/R Air conditioner relay
[Engine is running]
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”
(Compressor is operating).
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I A/C switch is “OFF”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
28 B/P Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I For 1 second after turning ignition switch “ON”
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I 1 second passed after turning ignition switch
“ON”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-134
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
29 G
Swirl control valve con-
trol solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
50°C (59 to 122°F).
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is above 50°C
(122°F).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
34 LG
Cooling fan relay
(High)
[Engine is running]
I Cooling fan is operating at high speed.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Cooling fan is not operating.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
35 BR/R Cooling fan relay (Low)
[Engine is running]
I Cooling fan is operating.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Cooling fan is not operating.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
38 LG/B MIL
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
39 OR/G
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
40 OR/L
EVAP canister vent
control valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
42 BR/W Start signal
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 12V
43 R Ignition switch
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
44 G/OR PNP switch
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Gear position is “P” or “N”.
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
45 G/B
Air conditioner switch
signal
[Engine is running]
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
I A/C switch is “OFF”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
46 W/L
Ambient air tempera-
ture switch signal
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Ambient air temperature is above 25°C (77°F).
I Air conditioner is operating.
0V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Ambient air temperature is above 25°C (77°F).
I Air conditioner is not operating.
Approximately 5V
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-135
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
47 G
Power steering oil
pressure switch
[Engine is running]
I Steering wheel is being turned.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Steering wheel is not being turned.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
48 B ECM ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Engine ground
49 W
Electronic controlled
engine mount-1
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
I Except the above
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
50 W/R
Electronic controlled
engine mount-2
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Except the above
0 - 1.0V
51 PU A/C cut signal
[Engine is running]
I Air conditioner is operating.
0 - 0.5V
52 W/G Electrical load signal
[Engine is running]
I Rear window defogger: ON
I Hi-beam headlamp: ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Electrical load: OFF
0V
55 W/B
Swirl control valve con-
trol vacuum check
switch
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
50°C (59 to 122°F).
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Engine coolant temperature is above 50°C
(122°F).
0 - 1.0V
56 GY/L
Throttle position switch
(Closed position)
[Engine is running]
I Accelerator pedal fully released
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Accelerator pedal depressed
Approximately 0V
57 B ECM ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Engine ground
58 B Sensors’ ground
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
59 B
Fuel level sensor
ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
61 W Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
1.2 - 1.8V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.2V
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-136
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
62 W
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Peri-
odically change)
SEF059V
63 W
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Peri-
odically change)
SEF059V
64 Y/G
Intake air temperature
sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
intake air temperature.
65
75
W
W
Crankshaft position
sensor (REF)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V★
(AC voltage)
SEF581X
66
76
W
W
Camshaft position sen-
sor (PHASE)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 4.2V★
(AC voltage)
SEF582X
67 W/L
Power supply for ECM
(Buck-up)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
70 Y
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
engine coolant temperature.
71 W
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
72 W
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-137
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
73 B
Mass air flow sensor
ground
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
80 W
Absolute pressure sen-
sor
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 4.4V
81 W
Refrigerant pressure
sensor
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
(Compressor operates.)
1.0 - 4.0V
82 W
Throttle position sensor
signal output
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Accelerator pedal fully released
Approximately 0.4V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Approximately 4V
83 G Fuel level sensor [Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
fuel level.
84 W
EVAP control system
pressure sensor
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 3.4V
85 W
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Approximately 2.4V
SEF057V
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
Approximately 2.3V
SEF058V
86 P/L Vehicle speed sensor
[Engine is running]
I Jack up front wheels.
I In 1st gear position
I 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Approximately 2.5V
SEF583X
[Engine is running]
I Jack up front wheels.
I In 2nd gear position
I 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Approximately 2.0V
SEF584X
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-138
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
91 L/W Throttle position sensor
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Accelerator pedal fully released
0.15 - 0.85V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.5 - 4.7V
92 P/L
Fuel tank temperature
sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
fuel tank temperature.
93 W Knock sensor
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Approximately 2.5V
101
102
103
104
105
107
R/B
L/W
R/W
PU/R
R/Y
R/L
Injector No. 1
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 2
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 4
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
106
108
B
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Engine ground
110
112
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
111 R Sensors’ power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
114 Y/B
Communication line
(LAN)
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Approximately 2V
115 OR Data link connector
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected.
Approximately 2V
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-139
Description
NHEC0648
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATAMONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
I B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
I A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
I MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition
NHEC0649
I Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)
I Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm
2
, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
I Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
I Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
I Transmission: Warmed-up*1
I Electrical load: Not applied*2
I Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T or CVT models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until
“FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T or CVTfluid temperature sensor signal) indicates less than 0.9V. For M/Tmodels, drive
vehicle for 5 minutes after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Cooling fans are not oper-
ating. Steering wheel is straight ahead.
SEF601Z
Inspection Procedure
NHEC0650
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale dis-
play.
1. Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MASA/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-141.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description
EC-140
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0651
SEF613ZA
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-141
SEF768Z
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-142
SEF615Z
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-143
Description
NHEC0045
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom-
er’s complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indi-
cate the specific problem area.
COMMON I/I REPORT SITUATIONS
NHEC0045S01
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0046
1 INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION — RELATED INFORMATION”, EC-80.
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-30, “GROUND INSPECTION”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace.
3 SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-25, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace.
4 CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-22, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Repair or replace connector.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
EC-144
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
NHEC0047
MEC134D
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
EC-145
MEC717C
SEC002C
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-146
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NHEC0049
1 INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 9.
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 43 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF291X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19, E89
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
© Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-147
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEC003C
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 2, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF292X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I 15A fuses
I Joint connector-13
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 26 and ECM relay terminal 1.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © Go to “DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-506.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-148
9 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 67 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF293X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.
10 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
11 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF294X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG (Battery voltage
does not exist.)
© GO TO 12.
NG (Battery voltage
exists for more than a
few seconds.)
© GO TO 14.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-149
12 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEC003C
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF295X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
13 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Joint connector-13
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and 15A fuse
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14 CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ECM relay terminal 5.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
15 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-150
16 CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace ECM relay.
17 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
18 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-151
SEF987W
Component Description
NHEC0050
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0051
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
MAS A/F SE-B1
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.2V
CAL/LD VALUE ditto
Idle 14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0%
MASS AIRFLOW ditto
Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0053
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM when engine is not running,
(Malfunction B) an excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent
to ECM when engine is running,
(Malfunction C) a high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving condition,
(Malfunction D) a low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving condition,
(Malfunction E) a voltage from the sensor is constantly approx.
1.0V when engine is running.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NHEC0053S02
When the malfunction B is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Component Description
EC-152
Possible Cause
NHEC0426
MALFUNCTION A OR C
NHEC0426S01
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Mass air flow sensor
MALFUNCTION B, D OR E
NHEC0426S02
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake air leaks
I Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0054
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first.
If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCE-
DURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND E”.
If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B AND E”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
If there is no problem on ”PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
C”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0054S01
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0054S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 6 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
With GST
NHEC0054S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND E
NHEC0054S02
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0054S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
With GST
NHEC0054S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Possible Cause
EC-153
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is confirmed after more than 5 seconds, there may
be malfunction C.
SEF174Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
NHEC0054S03
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with
engine stopped (Ignition switch “ON”) instead of running engine at
idle speed.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0054S0301
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4) Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
With GST
NHEC0054S0302
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-154
SEF243Y
SEF175Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D
NHEC0054S04
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0054S0402
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Check the voltage of MAS AIR/FL SE with “DATA MONITOR”.
5) Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6) Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-157.
If OK, go to following step.
7) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL POS SEN More than 3V
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
8) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-157.
SEF534P
Overall Function Check
NHEC0055
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D
NHEC0055S01
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow
sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be con-
firmed.
With GST
NHEC0055S0101
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
3) Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “MODE 1”.
4) Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-157.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-155
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0056
MEC799C
SEF650XB
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-156
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0057
1 INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A, B, C, D or E) is duplicated?
MTBL0373
Type I or Type II
Type I © GO TO 3.
Type II © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Reconnect the parts.
3 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 4.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-157
4 CHECK MAFS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (MAFS) harness connector.
SEF256X
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAFS terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF297X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
© Repair harness or connectors.
6 CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 3 and ECM terminal 73.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-158
7 CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 1 and ECM terminal 61.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor.
9 CHECK MAFS SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I Joint connector-18
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-159
SEF052V
SEF946S
Component Description
NHEC0058
The absolute pressure sensor detects ambient barometric pressure
and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure
increases, the voltage rises.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0059
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
NHEC0427
I Harness or connectors
(Absolute pressure sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Absolute pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0060
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
EC-160
SEF058Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0060S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 10 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-163.
WITH GST
NHEC0060S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-161
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0062
MEC135D
SEF651XB
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-162
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0063
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect absolute pressure sensor harness connector.
SEC004C
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace harness connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-163
3 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between absolute pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF299X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between absolute pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and absolute pressure sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and absolute pressure sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 80 and absolute pressure sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-164
7 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
SEF300X
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace absolute pressure sensor.
8 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 2 and ground
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-165
SEF258X
SEF012P
Component Description
NHEC0064
The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct hous-
ing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig-
nal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
<Reference data>
Intake air
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 64
(Intake air temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0065
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively low or high voltage from the sen-
sor is sent to ECM,
(Malfunction B) rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent
to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant
temperature sensor.
Possible Cause
NHEC0428
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake air temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0066
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st trip
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MAL-
FUNCTION B”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description
EC-166
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0066S01
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0066S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-169.
With GST
NHEC0066S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF176Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NHEC0066S02
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the
shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be
easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0066S0201
1) Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C
(194°F).
a) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
b) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c) Check the engine coolant temperature.
d) If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C
(194°F), turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool down engine.
I Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature
is above 90°C (194°F).
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine.
5) Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100
consecutive seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-169.
With GST
NHEC0066S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-167
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0067
MEC801C
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-168
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0068
1 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor harness connector.
SEF258X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground.
SEF301X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
© Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-169
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and intake air temperature sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF302X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace intake air temperature sensor.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-170
SEF594K
Component Description
NHEC0069
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF012P
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0070
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NHEC0070S02
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch
“ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II
display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
Start
80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
EC-171
Possible Cause
NHEC0429
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0071
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0071S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-174.
WITH GST
NHEC0071S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause
EC-172
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0072
MEC802C
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-173
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0073
1 CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) harness connector.
SEC005C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF585X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2 CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-174
4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-175
Description
NHEC0074
NOTE:
If DTC P0120 is displayed with DTC P0510, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510. Refer to
EC-438.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0074S01
The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiom-
eter which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal
to the ECM.
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sen-
sor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the “Wide open and closed
throttle position switch”, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control.
AEC929
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0075
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL POS SEN
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
ABSOL TH·P/S
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: fully closed 0.00%
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80.0%
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description
EC-176
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0077
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively low or high voltage from the sen-
sor is sent to ECM,
(Malfunction B) a high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving conditions,
(Malfunction C) a low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving conditions.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NHEC0077S02
When the malfunction Ais detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Throttle position sensor
circuit
Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
Possible Cause
NHEC0430
MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0430S01
I Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Throttle position sensor
MALFUNCTION B
NHEC0430S02
I Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Throttle position sensor
I Fuel injector
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Mass air flow sensor
MALFUNCTION C
NHEC0430S03
I Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake air leaks
I Throttle position sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0078
NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the
1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNC-
TION B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-177
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0078S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
I This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
SEF065Y
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0078S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
Vehicle speed More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N” position
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-182.
With GST
NHEC0078S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NHEC0078S02
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0078S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If idle speed is over 1,000 rpm, maintain the following condi-
tions for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed below 1,000
rpm.
Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N”
Brake pedal Depressed
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-182.
With GST
NHEC0078S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-178
SEF177Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
NHEC0078S03
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0078S0301
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5) Select “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Press RECORD on CONSULT-II SCREEN at the same time
accelerator pedal is depressed.
7) Print out the recorded graph and check the following:
I The voltage rise is linear in response to accelerator pedal
depression.
I The voltage when accelerator pedal is fully depressed is
approximately 4V.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-182.
If OK, go to following step.
SEF245YB
8) Select “AUTO TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
SEF178Y
9) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm
MAS AIR/FL SE More than 3.2V
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-179
10) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-182.
SEF305X
With GST
NHEC0078S0302
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
Gear position Suitable position
Engine speed More than 2,000 rpm
Engine coolant temperature More than 70°C (158°F)
Voltage between ECM termi-
nal 91 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground
More than 3.2V
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-182.
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-180
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0079
MEC803C
SEF652XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-181
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0080
1 INSPECTION START
Which malfunction A, B or C is duplicated?
MTBL0066
TypeA,BorC
TypeAorB © GO TO 4.
Type C © GO TO 2.
2 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0595
© GO TO 3.
3 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the following for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Reconnect the parts.
4 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 5.
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-182
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.
SEC001C
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between throttle position sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF306X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle position sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and throttle position sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-183
8 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 91 and throttle position sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF062Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.
10 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL0231
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-184
11 ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0595
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
12 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconneted.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor.
13 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P0335 and P1336. Refer to EC-344, 524.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
14 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P1335. Refer to EC-518.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-185
15 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
SEF964XA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Replace fuel injector.
16 CHECK THROTTLE POSTION SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18
3. Check the following
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 2 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
I Also check harness for short to power.
I Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-186
Description
NHEC0081
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0115, first perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0115. Refer to EC-171.
SEF594K
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0081S01
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF012P
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 9.2
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0082
Malfunction is detected when voltage sent to ECM from the sen-
sor is not practical, even when some time has passed after start-
ing the engine, or engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Description
EC-187
Possible Cause
NHEC0431
I Harness or connectors
(High resistance in the circuit)
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
I Thermostat
SEF174Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0083
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0083S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4) Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-190.
WITH GST
NHEC0083S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Possible Cause
EC-188
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0084
MEC802C
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-189
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0085
1 CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
SEC005C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF303X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2 CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-190
4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
5 CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant
does not flow.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to LC-15, “Thermostat”.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-191
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NHEC0086
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia.The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0087
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
MO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
MO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF237U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0089
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approxi-
mately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output
voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diag-
nosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.
Malfunction is detected when the voltage from the sensor is con-
stantly approx. 0.3V.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
EC-192
Possible Cause
NHEC0432
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
SEF643Y
SEF644Y
SEF645Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0090
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0090S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0130” or “HO2S1 (B2) P0150” of
“HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Touch “START”.
4) Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4.
5) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 2,400 rpm
Vehicle speed 70 - 120 km/h (43 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 10 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-197.
During this test, P1148 and P1168 may be stored in ECM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause
EC-193
SEF308XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0091
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0091S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1)
signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
I The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-197.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Overall Function Check
EC-194
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0092
BANK 1
NHEC0092S01
MEC408D
SEF854YB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-195
BANK 2
NHEC0092S02
MEC409D
SEF855YB
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-196
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0093
1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
3. Make sure HO2S1 (front) harness protector color, and disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) har-
ness connector.
SEC020C
SEF902XA
© GO TO 2.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-197
2 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0596
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (fornt) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0597
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-198
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-199
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-200
6 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-201
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NHEC0094
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia.The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0095
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF300U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0097
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is
sufficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low.
When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunc-
tion will be detected.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum and minimum voltage
from the sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-202
Possible Cause
NHEC0433
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0098
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEF649Y
SEF650Y
SEF651Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0098S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0131” or
“HO2S1 (B2) P0151” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,600 rpm
Vehicle speed 80 - 100 km/h (50 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-204.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-203
SEF308XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0099
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0099S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1)
signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3) Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
I The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-204.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0100
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
© GO TO 3.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check
EC-204
3 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
SEF215Z
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-80.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-292.
No © GO TO 4.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-205
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
1. Stop engine.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
3. Disconnect HO2S1 (front) harness connector.
4. Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 7.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-206
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-207
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-208
8 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. For circuit, refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-192.
4. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
6. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
For circuit, refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-195.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-209
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NHEC0101
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia.The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0102
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF299U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0104
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is
sufficiently high. The “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be
detected.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum and minimum voltages
from the sensor are beyond the specified voltages.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-210
Possible Cause
NHEC0434
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0105
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEF653Y
SEF654Y
SEF655Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0105S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0132” or
“HO2S1 (B2) P0152” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,600 rpm
Vehicle speed 80 - 100 km/h (50 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-212.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-211
SEF308XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0106
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0106S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1)
signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3) Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
I The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
I The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-212.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0107
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
© GO TO 3.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check
EC-212
3 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
SEF215Z
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-80.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-300.
No © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
4. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-213
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 8.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-214
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-215
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-216
9 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
For circuit, refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-195.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
For circuit, refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-195.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-217
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NHEC0108
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia.The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0109
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF010V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0111
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), this
diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed
and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the
compensated time [front oxygen sensor 1 (front) cycling time index]
is inordinately long or not.
Malfunction is detected when the response of the voltage signal
from the sensor takes more than the specified time.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-218
Possible Cause
NHEC0435
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks
I Exhaust gas leaks
I PCV valve
I Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0112
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-219
SEF656Y
SEF657Y
SEF658Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0112S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” or
“HO2S1 (B2) P0153” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 40 to 50 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-223.
SEF308XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0113
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0113S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1)
signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
I The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V →
0 - 0.3V
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-223.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-220
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0114
BANK 1
NHEC0114S01
MEC408D
SEF854YB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
EC-221
BANK 2
NHEC0114S02
MEC409D
SEF855YB
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-222
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0115
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
© GO TO 3.
3 CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace.
4 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair or replace.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-223
5 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
SEF215Z
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-80.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-292,
300.
No © GO TO 6.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-224
6 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) HARNESS PROTECTOR COLOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector.
SEC020C
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF902XA
© GO TO 7.
7 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0598
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0599
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-225
8 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 13.
9 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-226
10 CHECK PCV VALVE
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove PCV valve ventilation hose from PCV valve.
4. Make sure that a hissing noise will be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt immediately
when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
SEC137A
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 12.
NG © Replace PCV valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-227
11 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-228
12 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
13 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
14 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-229
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NHEC0116
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia.The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0117
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF301U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0119
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated
oxygen sensor 1 (front) output is not inordinately high.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Component Description
EC-231
Possible Cause
NHEC0436
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor1 (front)
SEF174Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0120
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0120S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-235.
WITH GST
NHEC0120S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
6) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
7) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-235.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Possible Cause
EC-232
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0121
BANK 1
NHEC0121S01
MEC408D
SEF854YB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram
EC-233
BANK 2
NHEC0121S02
MEC409D
SEF855YB
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-234
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0122
1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF902XA
© GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
© GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-235
3 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0614
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0615
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-236
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-237
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-238
Description
NHEC0123
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NHEC0123S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Heated oxy-
gen sensor 1
heater (front)
control
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters
(front)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters (front) corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
NHEC0123S02
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters (front)
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0124
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0126
Malfunction is detected when the current amperage in the heated
oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is out of the normal range.
(An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the front
heated oxygen sensor heater.)
Possible Cause
NHEC0437
I Harness or connectors
[The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is open or
shorted.]
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Description
EC-239
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0127
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0127S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-243.
WITH GST
NHEC0127S02
1) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
4) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
5) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-243.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-240
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0128
BANK 1
NHEC0128S01
MEC410D
SEF655XD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-241
BANK 2
NHEC0128S02
MEC411D
SEF656XD
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-242
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0129
1 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF902XA
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between HO2S1 (front) terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF311X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-243
3 CHECK HO2S1 (FRONT) OUTPUT SINGAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0613
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-244
5 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-245
SEF327R
Component Description
NHEC0130
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0131
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
SEF304U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0133
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
(Manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunc-
tions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the
minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various
driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when the minimum voltage from the sen-
sor is not reached to the specified voltage.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-246
Possible Cause
NHEC0438
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
SEF545Z
SEF546Z
SEF547Z
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0134
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0134S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
6) Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0137” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0157” of
“HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-251.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the fol-
lowing.
a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
b) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
d) Start engine.
e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
SEF312XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0135
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0135S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 [HO2S2 (B1)
signal] or 71 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-247
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once during
this procedure.
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-251.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-248
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0136
BANK 1
NHEC0136S01
MEC412D
SEF657XD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
EC-249
BANK 2
NHEC0136S02
MEC413D
SEF658XD
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-250
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0137
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
SEF215Z
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-80.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-300.
No © GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-251
3 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated coxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0600
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0601
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-252
4 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-253
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 71 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when rewing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignitioin switch OFF.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-254
9 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-255
SEF327R
Component Description
NHEC0138
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0139
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
SEF303U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0141
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
(Manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunc-
tions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the
maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the vari-
ous driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum voltage from the sen-
sor is not reached to the specified voltage.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-256
Possible Cause
NHEC0439
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks
SEF663Y
SEF664Y
SEF665Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0142
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0142S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
6) Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0138” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0158” of
“HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-261.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the fol-
lowing.
a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
b) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
d) Start engine.
e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
SEF312XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0143
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0143S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 [HO2S2 (B1)
signal] or 71 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-257
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once during
this procedure.
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-261.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-258
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0144
BANK 1
NHEC0144S01
MEC412D
SEF657XD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
EC-259
BANK 2
NHEC0144S02
MEC413D
SEF658XD
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-260
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0145
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
SEF215Z
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-80.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-292.
No © GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-261
3 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0602
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0603
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-262
4 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-263
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 71 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-264
9 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-265
SEF327R
Component Description
NHEC0146
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0147
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
SEF302U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0149
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
(Manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunc-
tions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the
switching response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified
during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when it takes more time for the sensor to
respond between rich and lean than the specified time.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-266
Possible Cause
NHEC0440
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks
SEF666Y
SEF667Y
SEF668Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0150
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0150S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
6) Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of
“HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-271.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the fol-
lowing.
a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
b) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
d) Start engine.
e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
SEF312XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0151
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0151S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 [HO2S2 (B1)
signal] or 71 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-267
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-271.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-268
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0152
BANK 1
NHEC0152S01
MEC412D
SEF657XD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
EC-269
BANK 2
NHEC0152S02
MEC413D
SEF658XD
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-270
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0153
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
SEF215Z
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC No. 0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-80.
7. Make sure DTC No. 0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-292,
300.
No © GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-271
3 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0604
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0605
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-272
4 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-273
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 71 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-274
9 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-275
SEF327R
Component Description
NHEC0154
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0155
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up
Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN +, RICH
SEF305U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0157
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
(Manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunc-
tions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the
voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Component Description
EC-276
Possible Cause
NHEC0441
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
SEF189Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0158
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0158S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
3) Stop vehicle with engine running.
4) Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,300 - 3,100 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE 64 - 130 km/h (40 - 81 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 0.5 - 6.4 msec
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
Selector lever Suitable position
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-281.
SEF312XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0159
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0159S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 [HO2S2 (B1)
signal] or 71 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Possible Cause
EC-277
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 2V during this procedure.
5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-281.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-278
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0160
BANK 1
NHEC0160S01
MEC412D
SEF657XD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram
EC-279
BANK 2
NHEC0160S02
MEC413D
SEF658XD
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-280
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0161
1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
3. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
4. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
5. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
© GO TO 2.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-281
2 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0606
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0607
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) CONNECTORS FOR WATER
Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) connector and harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-282
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 71 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-283
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
9 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-284
Description
NHEC0162
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NHEC0162S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Heated oxy-
gen sensor 2
heater (rear)
control
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters
(rear)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters (rear) corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
NHEC0162S02
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters (rear)
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0163
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
I Engine is running above 3,600 rpm.
OFF
I Engine is running below 3,600 rpm after driving for 2 minutes at a
speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more.
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0165
Malfunction is detected when the current amperage in the heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is out of the normal range.
[An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear).]
Possible Cause
NHEC0442
I Harness or connectors
[The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is open or
shorted.]
I Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Description
EC-285
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0166
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0166S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
4) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-289.
WITH GST
NHEC0166S02
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
3) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Start engine.
6) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
7) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
8) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
9) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-289.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-286
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0167
BANK 1
NHEC0167S01
MEC414D
SEF659XD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Wiring Diagram
EC-287
BANK 2
NHEC0167S02
MEC415D
SEF660XD
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-288
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0168
1 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 3 and ground.
SEF314X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-289
3 CHECK HO2S2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0608
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Check the resistance between HO2S2 (rear) terminals as follows.
SEF315X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEC021C
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-290
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0169
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front)
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel injec-
tion control
Injectors
Malfunction is detected when fuel injection system does not operate properly, the amount of mixture ratio
compensation is too large.
(The mixture ratio is too lean.)
Possible Cause
NHEC0487
I Intake air leaks
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I Injectors
I Exhaust gas leaks
I Incorrect fuel pressure
I Lack of fuel
I Mass air flow sensor
SEF215Z
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0170
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0170S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT”
in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-296.
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction, too.
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-296. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-292
SEF256X
WITH GST
NHEC0170S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-296.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-296. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-293
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0171
BANK 1
NHEC0171S01
MEC416D
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Wiring Diagram
EC-294
BANK 2
NHEC0171S02
MEC417D
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-295
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0172
1 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace.
2 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace.
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0609
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0610
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-296
4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-49.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm
2
, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm
2
, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-618.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-50.)
I Fuel lines (Refer to MA-16, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
I Fuel filter for clogging
© Repair or replace.
6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-152.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-297
7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-608.
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-298
8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2 (for DTC P0171), bank 1 (for DTC P0174).
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EC-51.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors on bank 1 (for DTC P0171), bank 2 (for DTC P0174) should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors.
SEF595Q
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new
ones.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-299
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0173
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front)
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel injec-
tion control
Injectors
Malfunction is detected when fuel injection system does not operate properly, the amount of mixture ratio
compensation is too large.
(The mixture ratio is too rich.)
Possible Cause
NHEC0488
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I Injectors
I Exhaust gas leaks
I Incorrect fuel pressure
I Mass air flow sensor
SEF215Z
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0174
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0174S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT”
in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-304.
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction, too.
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-304. If
engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for
fouling, etc.
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-300
SEF256X
WITH GST
NHEC0174S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-304.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-304. If
engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visu-
ally.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-301
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0175
BANK 1
NHEC0175S01
MEC416D
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Wiring Diagram
EC-302
BANK 2
NHEC0175S02
MEC417D
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-303
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0176
1 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace.
2 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace.
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0611
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0612
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-304
4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-49.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm
2
, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm
2
, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-618.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-50.)
© Repair or replace.
6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-152.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-305
7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-609.
8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-51.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors bank 2 (for DTC P0172), bank 1 (for P0175).
The injector harness connectors on bank 1 (for P0172), bank 2 (for P0175) should remain connected.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.) © GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.) © Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-306
SEF263X
Component Description
NHEC0177
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF012P
<Reference data>
Fuel temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 92
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0178
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage is
sent to ECM, rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM, compared
with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
Possible Cause
NHEC0489
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description
EC-307
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0179
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
SEF174Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0179S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-310.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4) Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the follow-
ing step.
5) Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).
6) Wait at least 10 seconds.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-310.
WITH GST
NHEC0179S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-308
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0180
MEC146D
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-309
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0181
1 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
SEF263X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF586X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
© Repair harness or connector.
3 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-310
4 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
SEF587X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-311
System Description
NHEC0608
COOLING FAN CONTROL
NHEC0608S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Cooling fan
control
Cooling fan relay(s)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Ignition switch Start signal
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refriger-
ant pressure and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
OPERATION
NHEC0608S02
SEF578XA
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0609
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
AIR COND SIG
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates)
ON
COOLING FAN
I After warming up engine, idle
the engine.
I Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
94°C (201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C
(219°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is
105°C (221°F) or more
HIGH
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
System Description
EC-312
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0610
This diagnosis checks whether the engine coolant temperature is
extraordinary high, even when the load is not heavy.
When malfunction is detected, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
will light up even in the first trip.
Malfunction is detected when engine coolant temperature is exces-
sively high under normal engine speed.
Possible Cause
NHEC0611
I Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted)
I Cooling fan
I Thermostat
I Improper ignition timing
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
I Blocked radiator
I Blocked front end (Improper fitting of nose mask)
I Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle frontal is collided but not
repaired)
I Blocked air passage by improper installation of front fog lamp
or fog lamps.
I Improper mixture ratio of coolant
I Damaged bumper
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-329.
Overall Function Check
NHEC0612
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the coolant
overtemperature enrichment protection check, a DTC might not be
confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high-pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap
by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to
escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
SEF621W
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0612S01
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
mixture ratio.
I If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the
proper range, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%,
replace the coolant in the following procedure MA-14, “Chang-
ing Engine Coolant”.
a) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-313
of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant from a kettle. Be sure
to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12,
“Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
b) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow
noise is emitted.
c) After checking or replacing coolant, go to step 3 below.
2) Ask the customer if engine coolant has been added. If it has
been added, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After
repair, go to the next step.
3) Start engine and let it idle.
4) Make sure that A/C switch is “OFF” and air conditioner is not
operating. If NG, check air conditioner circuit. Refer to HA-28,
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”. After repair, go to the next step.
5) Perform “COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
a) Set “COOLANT TEMP” to 95°C (203°F) and make sure that
cooling fan operates at low speed.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
b) Set “COOLANT TEMP” to 105°C (221°F) and make sure that
cooling fan operates at high speed. If NG, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-318. After repair, go to the next step.
6) Check for blocked coolant passage.
a) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature, then grasp
radiator upper hose and lower hose and make sure that cool-
ant flows.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After repair, go
to the next step.
Be extremely careful not to touch any moving or adjacent
parts.
7) Check for blocked radiator air passage.
a) When market fog lamps have been installed, check for dam-
aged fans and clogging in the condenser and radiator.
b) Check the front end for clogging caused by insects or debris.
c) Check for improper fitting of front-end cover, damaged radia-
tor grille or bumper, damaged vehicle front.
If NG, take appropriate action and then go to the next step.
8) Check function of ECT sensor.
Refer to step 7 of “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
If NG, replace ECT sensor and go to the next step.
9) Check ignition timing. Refer to basic inspection, EC-109.
Make sure that ignition timing is 15°±2° at idle.
If NG, adjust ignition timing and then recheck.
WITH GST
NHEC0612S02
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
mixture ratio.
I If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the
proper range, and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%,
replace the coolant in the following procedure MA-14, “Chang-
ing Engine Coolant”.
a) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed
of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant from a kettle. Be sure
to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12,
“Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-314
b) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow
noise is emitted.
c) After checking or replacing coolant, go to step 3 below.
2) Ask the customer if engine coolant has been added. If it has
been added, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After
repair, go to the next step.
3) Start engine and let it idle.
4) Make sure that A/C switch is “OFF” and air conditioner is not
operating. If NG, check air conditioner circuit. Refer to HA-28,
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”. After repair, go to the next step.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”
6) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness con-
nector.
7) Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor.
8) Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After repair, go
to the next step.
9) Check for blocked coolant passage.
a) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature, then grasp
radiator upper hose and lower hose and make sure that cool-
ant flows.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318. After repair, go
to the next step.
Be extremely careful not to touch any moving or adjacent
parts.
10) Check for blocked radiator air passage.
a) When market fog lamps have been installed, check for dam-
aged fans and clogging in the condenser and radiator.
b) Check the front end for clogging caused by insects or debris.
c) Check for improper fitting of front-end cover, damaged radia-
tor grille or bumper, damaged vehicle front.
If NG, take appropriate action and then go to the next step.
11) Check function of ECT sensor.
Refer to step 6 of “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-318.
If NG, replace ECT sensor and go to the next step.
12) Check ignition timing. Refer to basic inspection, EC-109.
Make sure that ignition timing is 15°±2° at idle.
If NG, adjust ignition timing and then recheck.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-315
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0613
MEC759C
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Wiring Diagram
EC-316
MEC879C
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-317
SEF630XB
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0614
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 4.
2 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
SEC006C
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF646X
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-324.)
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-318
3 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF111X
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-327.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-319
4 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
SEC006C
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
SEC163BA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-324.)
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-320
5 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
MEF613EA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-327.)
6 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm
2
, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following for leak.
I Hose
I Radiator
I Water pump (Refer to LC-11, “Water Pump”.)
© Repair or replace.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-321
8 CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.
SLC755A
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm
2
,9-14psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace radiator cap.
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
SLC343
Valve opening temperature:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-15, “Thermostat”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace thermostat
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-322
10 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
11 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-329.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-323
PROCEDURE A
=NHEC0614S01
1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF590X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Joint connector-8
I Joint connector-9
I 15A fuse
I 40A fusible links
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-324
3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
SEC007C
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-1 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-2 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-325
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1
Check continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.
SEF591X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relay.
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation.
SEF592X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-326
PROCEDURE B
=NHEC0614S02
1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF593X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Joint connector-8
I Joint connector-9
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and joint connectors-8, -9
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and joint connectors-8, -9
© Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-2
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-3
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-327
4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 34 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Joint connector-10
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3
Check continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.
SEF591X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relays.
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation.
SEF592X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-328
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
NHEC0615
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 I Blocked radiator
I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille
I Blocked bumper
I Visual No blocking —
2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-11, “RECOM-
MENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.
3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and
radiator filler neck
See MA-14, “Changing
Engine Coolant”.
4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm
2
,9-14
psi) (Limit)
See LC-10, “System
Check”.
ON*
2
5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See LC-10, “System
Check”.
ON*
2
6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be
hot
See LC-15, “Thermostat”
and LC-17, “Radiator”.
ON*
1
7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P0217 (EC-312).
OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemi-
cal tester 4 Gas ana-
lyzer
Negative —
ON*
3
9 I Coolant temperature
gauge
I Visual Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
—
I Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
I Visual No overflow during driv-
ing and idling
See MA-14, “Changing
Engine Coolant”.
OFF*
4
10 I Coolant return from
reservoir tank to radia-
tor
I Visual Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
See MA-13, “ENGINE
MAINTENANCE”.
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler
gauge
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi-
mum distortion (warping)
See EM-41, “Inspection”.
12 I Cylinder block and pis-
tons
I Visual No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
See EM-61, “Inspection”.
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (56 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to LC-22, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-329
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0182
If a misfire occurs, the engine speed will fluctuate. If the fluctuation is detected by the crankshaft position sen-
sor (POS), the misfire is diagnosed.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal every 200
engine revolutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not cause damage to the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL
will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the
crankshaft positon sensor (POS) signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
Malfunction is detected when multiple cylinders misfire, No. 1 cylinder misfires, No. 2 cylinder misfires, No. 3
cylinder misfires, No. 4 cylinder misfires, No. 5 cylinder misfires and No. 6 cylinder misfires.
Possible Cause
NHEC0490
I Improper spark plug
I Insufficient compression
I Incorrect fuel pressure
I The injector circuit is open or shorted
I Injectors
I Intake air leak
I The ignition secondary circuit is open or shorted
I Lack of fuel
I Drive plate or flywheel
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-330
SEF213Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0183
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0183S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 to 3,000 rpm for at least
3 minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
NOTE:
Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving conditions.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-331.
WITH GST
NHEC0183S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0184
1 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Discover air leak location and repair.
2 CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
1. Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst (Manifold) and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace it.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-331
3 PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
SEF070Y
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a
momentary engine speed drop?
SEF281X
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © GO TO 7.
4 CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
MEC703B
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-608.
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-332
5 CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Disconnect ignition wire from spark plug.
2. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition wire.
3. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
4. Check for spark.
SEF575Q
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to “DTC P1320 IGNITION
SIGNAL”, EC-506.
6 CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
SEF156I
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to
MA-13, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”.
7 CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-12, “Measurement of Compression Pressure”.
Standard:
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm
2
, 185 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum:
981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm
2
, 142 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each cylinder:
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm
2
, 14 psi)/300 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-333
8 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-49.
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49.
At idle:
Approx. 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm
2
, 34 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 9.
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-618.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-50.)
I Fuel lines (Refer to MA-16, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
I Fuel filter for clogging
© Repair or replace.
10 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0595
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 12.
NG © Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-334
11 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and “HI SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and
“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
4. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
5. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:
SEF647Y
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-335
12 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
13 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEC020C
© Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
14 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-152.
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-336
15 CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in “Symptom Matrix Chart”, EC-123.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Repair or replace.
16 ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-80.
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
© GO TO 17.
17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-337
SEF332I
Component Description
NHEC0185
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element.Aknocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock
sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction.
The knock sensor has one trip detection logic.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0187
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage
from the knock sensor is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
NHEC0491
I Harness or connectors
(The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Knock sensor
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0188
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0188S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-340.
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Component Description
EC-338
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0189
MEC736C
SEF663XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-339
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0190
1 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 93 and engine ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
SEF321X
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 93 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connector F8, F131
I Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-340
4 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
SEF322X
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace knock sensor.
5 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
Loose and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 6.
6 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F8, F131.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F8 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F8, F131
I Joint connectors-18
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F8 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-341
SEF254P
Component Description
NHEC0191
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0492
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CKPS·RPM (POS)
I Tachometer: Connect
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
Almost the same speed as the
CONSULT-II value.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0193
Malfunction is detected when 1° signal is not entered to ECM for
the first few seconds during engine cranking, or 1° signal is not
entered to ECM during engine running.
Possible Cause
NHEC0493
I Harness or connectors
(The crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Starter motor (Refer to EL section.)
I Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.)
I Dead (Weak) battery
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Component Description
EC-343
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0194
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0194S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Crank engine for at least two seconds.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-346.
WITH GST
NHEC0194S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-344
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0195
MEC812C
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-345
SEF856Y
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0196
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-346
2 CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
SEF511WB
2. Check voltage between harness connector F25 terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF323X
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F25, F171
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-347
5 CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector F25 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.
SEF367Q
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector F171 terminals as follows.
MTBL0352
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK CKPS (POS) INSTALLATION
Check that CKPS (POS) and HO2S1 (B2) harness clamp are installed correctly as shown below.
SEM222FC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Install CKPS (POS) correctly.
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-348
8 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
SEF587P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II
1. Reconnect disconnected harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdriv-
ers.
SEF324X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
10 CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-349
11 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F25, F171
I Joint connector-18
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F25 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-350
SEF252P
Component Description
NHEC0197
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine
front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No.
signal.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the
camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the
sensor also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No.
signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0199
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) the cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the
first few seconds during engine cranking,
(Malfunction B) the cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during
engine running,
(Malfunction C) the cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern
during engine running.
Possible Cause
NHEC0494
I Harness or connectors
[The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is open or
shorted.]
I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
I Starting system circuit (Refer to SC section.)
I Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0200
NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Component Description
EC-351
SEF013Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0200S01
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0200S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-354.
With GST
NHEC0200S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C
NHEC0200S02
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0200S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-354.
With GST
NHEC0200S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-352
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0201
MEC418D
SEF857Y
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram
EC-353
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0202
1 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, “STARTING SYSTEM”.)
2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 3.
3 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and CMPS (PHASE) harness connector.
SEF274P
3. Check harness continuity between CMPS (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminals 66, 76. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-354
4 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between CMPS (PHASE) terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
5 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
2. Remove the CMPS (PHASE).
3. Visually check the CMPS (PHASE) for chipping.
SEF583P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
6 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II
Check resistance between CMPS (PHASE) terminals 1 and 2 as shown below.
SEF325X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-355
7 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-525, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-356
SEF484Y
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0214
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen
sensors 1 (front) and 2 (rear).
A three way catalyst (Manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2
(rear). As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen
sensor 2 (rear) switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and 2
(rear) approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst
(Manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
Malfunction is detected when three way catalyst (Manifold) does
not operate properly, three way catalyst does not have enough
oxygen storage capacity.
Possible Cause
NHEC0504
I Three way catalyst (Manifold)
I Exhaust tube
I Intake air leaks
I Injectors
I Injector leaks
I Spark plug
I Improper ignition timing
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-357
SEF940Z
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0215
SEF941Z
SEF535Z
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0215S01
TESTING CONDITION:
I Open engine hood before conducting the following proce-
dure.
I Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified
minutes below.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Rev engine up to 2,500 to 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step
7.
5) Wait 5 seconds at idle.
6) Rev engine up to 2,500 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of CATALYST changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
7) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
8) Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-359.
SEF329X
SEF330X
Overall Function Check
NHEC0216
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way
catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
WITH GST
NHEC0216S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 63 [HO2S1
(B1) signal], 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground, and
ECM terminals 72 [HO2S2 (B1) signal], 71 [HO2S2 (B2) sig-
nal] and engine ground.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
5) Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminals 72 and engine ground, or 71 and
engine ground is very less than that of ECM terminals 63 and
engine ground, or 62 and engine ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) voltage switching fre-
quency
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-358
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) voltage switching fre-
quency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst
(Manifold) does not operate properly. Go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-359.
NOTE:
If the voltage at terminal 62 or 63 does not switch periodically more
than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 5, perform trouble diagno-
sis for “DTC P0133, P0153” first. (See EC-218.)
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0217
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace.
2 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before the three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace.
3 CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-359
4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0595
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
5 CHECK INJECTORS
1. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for Injectors, EC-609.
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 107 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF331X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Perform “Diagnostic Procedure”, “INJECTOR”, EC-610.
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-360
6 CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
3. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
5. Check for spark.
SEF575Q
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-506.
7 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EC-51.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.) © GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.) © Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
Trouble is fixed. © INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed. © Replace three way catalyst (Manifold).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-361
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0218
NOTE:
If DTC P0440 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-564.)
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP can-
ister purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP canister vent control valve will then be closed to shut the EVAP
purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is opened to depressurize the EVAP
purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve will be closed.
SEF323U
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate prop-
erly.
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Possible Cause
NHEC0510
I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
I Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
I Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
I Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
I EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
I EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
I Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor
I Loose or disconnected rubber tube
I EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the
circuit
I Absolute pressure sensor
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
I O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or dam-
aged.
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-362
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water.
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I Fuel level sensor and the circuit
I Refueling control valve
I ORVR system leaks
SEF565X
SEF566X
SEF874X
SEF567X
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0219
NOTE:
I If DTC P0440 or P1440 is displayed with P1448, perform
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-564.)
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
I Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to
86°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0219S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-109.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-364.
WITH GST
NHEC0219S02
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-75
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-75.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
EC-363
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-75.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
I If P0440 or P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-364.
I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Proce-
dure” for DTC P1447, EC-556.
I If P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the screen,
go to the following step.
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0220
1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
SEF915U
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-364
3 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF989X
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm
2
, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm
2
, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-365
5 INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
SEC022C
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 6.
Models without CON-
SULT-II
© GO TO 7.
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-366
6 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm
2
, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair or replace.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-367
7 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
SEF254X
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm
2
, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair or replace.
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-368
8 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items2-4,replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace water separator.
9 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-384.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
10 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 14.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-369
11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 12.
12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
13 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
SEF984Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © GO TO 15.
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-370
15 CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-26.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 17.
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.
16 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-371
17 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF266X
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF266X
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-372
18 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
SEC004C
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
SEF300X
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace absolute pressure sensor.
19 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
SEF587X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 20.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-373
20 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 21.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
21 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-32.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 22.
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.
22 CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
© GO TO 23.
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-374
23 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connec-
tion. For location, refer to “ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)”, EC-38.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 24.
NG © Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
24 CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 25.
NG © Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
25 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SEF830X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 26.
NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
26 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-162, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 27.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-375
Description
NHEC0221
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NHEC0221S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM
function
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
EVAP can-
ister purge
flow control
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Throttle position switch Closed throttle position
Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front)
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by consider-
ing various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
SEF337U
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0221S02
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0222
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PURG VOL C/V
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0%
2,000 rpm —
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Description
EC-377
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0224
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the valve.
Possible Cause
NHEC0511
I Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0225
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0225S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-380.
WITH GST
NHEC0225S02
Follow the proocedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-378
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0226
MEC741C
SEF858Y
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-379
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0227
1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF266X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
SEF333X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-380
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connetors.
4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-381
5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-382
SEF032W
SEF267X
Component Description
NHEC0228
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is ener-
gized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The abil-
ity to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0229
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0231
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve.
Possible Cause
NHEC0512
I Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EVAP canister vent control valve
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
EC-383
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0232
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEF058Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0232S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-386.
WITH GST
NHEC0232S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-384
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0233
MEC742C
SEF668XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-385
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0234
1 INSPECTION START
1. Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn “ON”.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF989Y
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 3.
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-386
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
SEF267X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF336X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M5, B1
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-387
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF337X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-388
9 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.
10 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 9 again.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-389
SEF053V
SEF954S
Component Description
NHEC0235
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is
not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board
diagnosis.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0236
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0238
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal from
EVAP control system pressure sensor is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
NHEC0513
I Harness or connectors
(The EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Rubber hose to EVAP control system pressure sensor is
clogged, vent, kinked, disconnected or improper connection.
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
I EVAP canister
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Component Description
EC-390
I Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to water
separator
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0239
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
SEF194Y
SEF340X
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0239S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6) Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-393.
WITH GST
NHEC0239S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal 92 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-393.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
EC-391
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0240
MEC360D
SEF623XB
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-392
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0241
1 CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rubber tube connected to the EVAP control system pressure sensor for clogging, vent, kink, disconnection or
improper connection.
SEF268X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Reconnect, repair or replace.
2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 3.
3 CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace harness connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-393
4 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF341X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
© Repair harness or connectors.
6 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM (Transmission Control Module)
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-394
8 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 10.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 9.
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-395
11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF266X
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF266X
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-396
12 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
13 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF337X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-397
14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
15 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 14 again.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-398
16 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
17 CHECK RUBBER TUBE
Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-399
18 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items2-4,replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace water separator.
19 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
SEF596U
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 20.
No © GO TO 22.
20 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-400
21 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
22 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Disconnect harness connectors B2, M2.
3. Check harness continuity between harness connector M2 terminal 10 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 24.
NG © GO TO 23.
23 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Joint connector-17
I Harness for open or short between harness connector M2 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
24 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-401
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0644
NOTE:
If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-564.)
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
SEF323U
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP
control system does not operate properly.
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Possible Cause
NHEC0645
I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
I Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
I Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
I Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
I EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
I EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
I Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor
I Loose or disconnected rubber tube
I EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the
circuit
I Absolute pressure sensor
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
I O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or dam-
aged.
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-402
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I Refueling control valve
I ORVR system leaks
SEF565X
SEF566X
SEF874X
SEF567X
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0646
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Pro-
cedure.
NOTE:
I If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-564.)
I Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
I Open engine hood before conducting the following proce-
dures.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0646S01
1) Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-109.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If
it is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-404.
If P0440 is displayed, perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
EC-403
WITH GST
NHEC0646S02
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-75
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-75.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-75.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
I If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-404.
I If P0440 or P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, for DTC P0440, EC-364.
I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Proce-
dure” for DTC P1447, EC-556.
I If P0455, P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the
screen, go to the following step.
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0647
1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
SEF915U
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-404
2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF989X
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm
2
, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm
2
, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-405
5 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-32.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.
6 CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
© GO TO 7.
7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-384.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
8 INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
SEC022C
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 9.
Models without CON-
SULT-II
© GO TO 10.
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-406
9 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm
2
, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Repair or replace.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-407
10 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
SEF254X
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm
2
, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Repair or replace.
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-408
11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
SEF984Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
12 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 13.
13 CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-26.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 15.
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-409
14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-410
15 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEC004C
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF266X
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-411
16 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
SEC004C
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
SEF300X
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace absolute pressure sensor.
17 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
SEF587X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-412
18 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
19 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connec-
tion. For location, refer to “ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)”, EC-38.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 20.
NG © Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
20 CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 21.
NG © Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-413
21 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SEF830X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 22.
NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
22 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-414
SEF614X
Component Description
NHEC0616
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NHEC0617
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank
is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does
not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel
level sensor malfunction is detected.
Malfunction is detected when even though the vehicle is parked, a
signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM.
Possible Cause
NHEC0618
I Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel level sensor
SEF195Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0619
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0619S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-417.
WITH GST
NHEC0619S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Component Description
EC-415
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0620
MEC147D
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Wiring Diagram
EC-416
Diagnostic Procedure
=NHEC0621
1 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor until and fuel pump harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or a tester.
SEF524Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M6, B3
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuel level sensor until and fuel pump
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2, ECM terminal
59 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-417
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M110, B43
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-162, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-418
SEF614X
Component Description
=NHEC0622
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NHEC0623
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not
moving even after a long distance has been driven.
Malfunction is detected when the output signal of the fuel level
sensor does not change within the specified range even though the
vehicle has been driven a long distance.
Possible Cause
NHEC0624
I Harness or connectors
(The level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel level sensor
Overall Function Check
NHEC0625
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level
sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the
handling of the fuel. Refer to FE-5 “Fuel Tank”.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining
fuel and refilling fuel is required.
SEF195Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0625S01
NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel
cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in
advance.
1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure
Release”, EC-49.
3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was
removed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
Component Description
EC-419
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds then
turn “ON”.
6) Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
7) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8) Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
9) Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal,
6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
11) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
12) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether
the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11.
If NG, check the fuel level sensor, refer to EL-162, “FUEL
LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK”.
SEF615X
WITH GST
NHEC0625S02
NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel
cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in
advance.
1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure
Release”, EC-49.
3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was
removed.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
6) Set voltmeters probe between ECM terminal 83 (fuel level
sensor signal) and ground.
7) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
8) Check voltage between ECM terminal 83 and ground and note
it.
9) Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel
tank using proper equipment.
10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
11) Confirm that the voltage between ECM terminal 83 and ground
changes more than 0.03V during step8-10.
If NG, check component of fuel level sensor, refer to EL-162,
“FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK”.
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-420
SEF614X
Component Description
NHEC0626
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NHEC0627
ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor circuit.
One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel
level sensor ground circuit.
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit
malfunction.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage is
sent from the sensor is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
NHEC0628
I Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel level sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0629
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch “ON”.
SEF195Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0629S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-423.
WITH GST
NHEC0629S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Component Description
EC-421
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0630
MEC227D
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram
EC-422
Diagnostic Procedure
=NHEC0631
1 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor until and fuel pump harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF524Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M6, B3
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuel level sensor until and fuel pump
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2. Refer to Wir-
ing Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-423
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M110, B43
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness on connectors.
6 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-162, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-424
AEC110
Component Description
=NHEC0242
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0244
Malfunction is detected when the almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal
from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is
being driven.
Possible Cause
NHEC0514
I Harness or connector
(The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Vehicle speed sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0245
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
SEF196Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0245S01
1) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”).
2) Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable
gear position.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-428.
If OK, go to following step.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Component Description
EC-425
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 2,400 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 4 - 8 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-428.
Overall Function Check
NHEC0246
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0246S01
1) Lift up drive wheels.
2) Start engine.
3) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed
10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear posi-
tion.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-428.
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-426
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0247
MEC904C
SEF859Y
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-427
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0248
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 86 and combination meter terminal 32.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION
Make sure that speedometer functions properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness connectors F19, F111
I Harness connectors M15, E81
I Harness for open and short between combination meter and ABS actuator and electric unit
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
I Harness for open or short between vehicle speed sensor and ECM
I Harness for open or short between vehicle speed sensor and TCM (Transmission control module)
OK or NG
OK © Check combination meter and vehicle speed sensor. Refer to EL section.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-428
Description
NHEC0249
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NHEC0249S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Idle air
control
IACV-AAC valve
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Park/neutral position
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal
Battery Battery voltage
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Ambient air temperature switch Ambient air temperature
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
Absolute pressure sensor Ambient barometic pressure
This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified
level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the
amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC
valve. The IACV-AAC valve changes the opening of the air by-pass
passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actu-
ated by a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in
the axial direction in steps corresponding to the ECM output sig-
nals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respec-
tive opening of the air by-pass passage. (i.e. when the step
advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The
crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed
and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step
position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with
the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the
lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The opti-
mum value stored in the ECM is determined by takig into consid-
eration various engine conditions, such as during warm up,
deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and
cooling fan operation).
SEF765P
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0249S02
IACV-AAC Valve
NHEC0249S0201
The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases
and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and
OFF two windings each in seqeunce. Each time the IACV-AAC
valve opens or closes to change tha auxiliary air quantity, the ECM
sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the
auxiliary air quantity is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse
signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains
at that particular opening.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Description
EC-429
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0250
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
IACV-AAC/V
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 2 - 10 step
2,000 rpm —
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0252
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) the IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly,
(Malfunction B) the IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly.
Possible Cause
NHEC0515
MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0515S01
I Harness or connectors
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is open.)
I IACV-AAC valve
MALFUNCTION B
NHEC0515S02
I Harness or connectors
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is shorted.)
I Air control valve (Power steering)
I IACV-AAC valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0253
NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
I If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, per-
form “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66, before conducting
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle speed,
refer to the “Service Data and Specifications (SDS)”,
EC-644.
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
EC-430
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0253S01
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch “ON”.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0253S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm for three seconds, then let it
idle for three seconds.
Do not rev engine to more than 3,000 rpm.
5) Perform step 4 once more.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-433.
With GST
NHEC0253S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF174Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NHEC0253S02
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
I Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C
(14°F).
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0253S0201
1) Open engine hood.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-433.
With GST
NHEC0253S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-431
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0254
MEC817C
SEF625XB
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-432
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0255
1 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
SEC008C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between IACV-AAC valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF343X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC valve and ECM relay
© Repair harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-433
3 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and IACV-AAC valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0354
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-I
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector and IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at intake air duct.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence.
SEF971X
Vacuum slightly exists or does not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace air control valve (Power steering).
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-434
5 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-II
Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned.
SEF971X
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 6.
6 CHECK VACUUM PORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at vacuum port.
3. Blow air into vacuum port.
4. Check that air flows freely.
SEF972X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or clean vacuum port.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-435
7 CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES
1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power steer-
ing) and intake air duct.
2. Check the hoses and tubes for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair hoses or tubes.
8 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-I
1. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between IACV-AAC valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
SEF344X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-436
9 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-II
1. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”, and ensure the IACV-AAC valve makes operating sound according to the ignition
switch position.
SEC009C
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.
10 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
2. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66.
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © INSPECTION END
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
11 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hoses.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Also warm up transmission to normal operating temperature.
I For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates
less than 0.9V.
I For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running.
6. Check target idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-437
SEF505V
Component Description
NHEC0256
A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open
throttle position switch is used only for A/T control.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunc-
tioning.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0257
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CLSD THL/P SW
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: Idle position ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0259
Malfunction is detected when battery voltage from the closed
throttle position switch is sent to ECM with the throttle valve
opened.
Possible Cause
NHEC0516
I Harness or connectors
(The closed throttle position switch circuit is shorted.)
I Closed throttle position switch
I Throttle position sensor
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Component Description
EC-438
SEF197Y
SEF198Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0260
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0260S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
start engine.
3) Select “CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
If “CLSD THL/P SW” is not available, go to step 5.
4) Check the signal under the following conditions.
Condition Signal indication
Throttle valve: Idle position ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-442.
If OK, go to following step.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
THRTL POS SEN More than 2.5V
VHCL SPEED SE More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-442.
SEF345X
Overall Function Check
NHEC0261
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed
throttle position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0261S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Check the voltage between ECM terminal 56 (Closed throttle
position switch signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
At idle: Battery voltage
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-439
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0262
MEC818C
SEF626XC
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-441
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0263
1 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
SEC001C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between throttle position switch terminal 5 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF346X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM
© Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 56 and throttle position switch terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-442
4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AND ENGINE IDLE SPEED
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0616
Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 5.
Models without CON-
SULT-II
© GO TO 6.
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions.
Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
MTBL0355
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
6 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
4. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
SEC010C
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-443
7 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0595
Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch?
YesorNo
Yes (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 8.
Yes (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 9.
No © Replace throttle position switch.
8 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditins.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL0230
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor.
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-444
9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF348X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-445
System Description
NHEC0264
This circuit line (LAN) is used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/
deceleration.
Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module).
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only in TCM but also ECM after the A/T
related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0266
Malfunction is detected when ECM receives incorrect voltage from
TCM (Transmission Control Module) continuously.
Possible Cause
NHEC0517
I Harness or connectors
[The communication line circuit between ECM and TCM
(Transmission Control Module) is open or shorted.]
I TCM
I Dead (Weak) battery
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0267
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0267S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 2 seconds.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-448.
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
System Description
EC-446
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0269
MEC747C
SEF629XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
EC-447
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0270
1 CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.
SEC004C
SEF271X
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 114 and TCM terminal 33.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair harness or connectors.
2 CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 114 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectos.
3 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-448
SEC220B
Component Description
NHEC0271
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0272
Malfunction is detected when ECM calculation function is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
NHEC0518
I ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0273
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
SEF058Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0273S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Run engine for at least 30 seconds at idle speed.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-450.
WITH GST
NHEC0273S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description
EC-449
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0274
1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-449.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-449.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © INSPECTION END
2 REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-82.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-66,
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © INSPECTION END
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
DTC P0605 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-450
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0519
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the ther-
mostat even though the engine has run long enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat open stuck.
Malfunction is detected when the engine coolant temperature does
not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run
long enough.
Possible Cause
NHEC0520
I Thermostat function
I Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0521
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C
(14°F) or higher.
I For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of
–10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0521S01
1) Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to LC-15, “Thermo-
stat”. Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replace-
ment. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on.
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4) Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step.
If it is above 60°C (140°F), stop engine and cool down the
engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
5) Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following
conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-452.
WITH GST
NHEC0521S02
1) Follow the prodedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-451
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0522
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
3. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals under the following conditions.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-452
Description
NHEC0523
If DTC P1130 is displayed with P1165, first perform trouble diag-
nosis for DTC P1165, EC-478.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NHEC0523S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Swirl control
valve con-
trol
Swirl control valve control sole-
noid valve
" Vacuum signal
Swirl control valve actuator
"
Swirl control valve
Ignition switch Start signal
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
This system has a swirl control valve in the intake passage of each
cylinder.
While idling and during low engine speed operation, the swirl con-
trol valve closes. Thus the velocity of the air in the intake passage
increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a
swirl in the combustion chamber.
Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burn-
ing speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel consumption, and
increase the stability in running conditions.
Also, except when idling and during low engine speed operation,
this system opens the swirl control valve. In this condition, this
system tends to increase power by improving intake efficiency via
reduction of intake flow resistance, intake flow.
The solenoid valve controls swirl control valve’s shut/open condi-
tion. This solenoid valve is operated by the ECM.
Throttle position
sensor (Idle posi-
tion)
Engine speed
Swirl control valve
control solenoid
valve
Swirl control valve
ON Below 3,200 rpm ON Closed
OFF
Less than 3,200
rpm
ON Closed
More than 3,600
rpm
OFF Open
When engine coolant temperature is below 10°C (50°F) and above 55°C (131°F),
swirl control valve is kept open regardless of above condition.
SEF372X
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
EC-453
SEF272X
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0523S02
Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid Valve
NHEC0523S0201
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is
cut and the swirl control valve opens.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0524
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
SWRL CONT S/V I Engine speed: Idle
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F).
ON
Engine coolant temperature is
above 55°C (131°F).
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0526
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through
swirl control valve control solenoid valve,
(Malfunction B) The vacuum signal is not sent to swirl control
valve under specified driving conditions, even though swirl control
valve control solenoid valve is ON,
(Malfunction C) The vacuum signal is sent to swirl control valve
even though swirl control valve control solenoid valve is OFF.
Possible Cause
NHEC0527
MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0527S01
I Harness or connectors
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
MALFUNCTION B
NHEC0527S02
I Harness or connector
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open.)
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
I Intake system
(Intake air leaks)
I Hoses and tubes between intake manifold, vacuum tank and
swirl control valve actuator
I Swirl control valve actuator
I Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
I Mass air flow sensor
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Throttle position sensor
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
EC-454
MALFUNCTION C
NHEC0527S03
I Harness or connector
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is
shorted.)
I Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Throttle position sensor
I Hoses and tubes between air cleaner and swirl control valve
vacuum check switch
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0528
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC
cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B”.
If the 1st trip DTC is not confirmed on “Procedure for malfunc-
tion B”, perform “Procedure for malfunction C”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0528S01
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0528S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-458.
With GST
NHEC0528S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF174Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NHEC0528S02
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform the test at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine
immediately.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0528S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4) Confirm COOLAN TEMP/S value is 40°C (104°F) or less.
If the value is more than 40°C (104°F), park the vehicle in a
cool place and retry from step 1.
5) Start engine and wait until COOLAN TEMP/S value increases
to more than 55°C (131°F).
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-458.
With GST
NHEC0528S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
EC-455
SEF174Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
NHEC0528S03
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform the test at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0528S0301
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip
DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-458.
With GST
NHEC0528S0302
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-456
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0529
MEC749C
SEF627XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-457
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0530
PROCEDURE A
NHEC0530S01
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEC012C
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 3.
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-458
3 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF272X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-459
6 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF046Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF047Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-460
PROCEDURE B
NHEC0530S02
1 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check intake air system for air leaks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 3.
NG © Repair intake system.
2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEC012C
3. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-461
3 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF272X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-462
6 CHECK HOSES
Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold, and swirl control valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection
or disconnection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair hoses or tubes.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-463
7 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF046Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF047Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-464
8 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect vacuum hose between swirl control valve actuator and swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
5. Make sure that swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to “SWIRL CONT SOL/V indication.
SEF621X
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect vacuum hose between swirl control valve actuator and swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Apply 12V direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
4. Make sure that swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to 12V direct current being applied.
SEF621X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace swirl control valve and actuator.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-465
9 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
3. Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF709X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
10 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 12.
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor.
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-466
11 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF062Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
12 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL0231
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-467
13 ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0595
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
14 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
3. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping.
SEF585P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
15 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2.
SEF350X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-468
16 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE C
NHEC0530S03
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEC012C
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-469
3 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF272X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-470
6 CHECK HOSES
Check hoses and tubes between air cleaner and swirl control valve vacuum check switch for clogging or improper connec-
tion.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair hoses or tubes.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-471
7 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF046Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF047Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-472
8 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
3. Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF709X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
3. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping.
SEF585P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-473
10 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2.
SEF350X
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 12.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
11 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF062Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-474
12 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL0231
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
13 ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0595
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
14 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-475
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0282
★ The closed loop control has the one trip detection logic.
Malfunction is detected when the closed loop control function for
bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the speci-
fied condition, the closed loop control function for bank 2 does not
operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition.
Possible Cause
NHEC0531
I The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit is open or shorted.
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) heater
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0283
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm during the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”. If the engine speed limit is
exceeded, retry the procedure from step 2.
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEC011C
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0283S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check one of the follow-
ing.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go above 0.70V at least
once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go below 0.21V at least
once.
If the check result is NG, perform “Diagnosis Procedure”,
EC-477.
DTC P1148 (BANK 1), P1168 (BANK 2) CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-476
If the check result is OK, perform the following step.
4) Let engine idle at least 5 minutes.
5) Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive sec-
onds.
B/FUEL SCHDL 3 msec or more
ENG SPEED 1,800 - 3,000 rpm
Selector lever Suitable position
VHCL SPEED SE More than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
During this test, P0130 and/or P0150 may be displayed on
CONSULT-II screen.
6) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-477.
SEF308XB
Overall Function Check
NHEC0284
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop
control. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0284S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 [HO2S1 (B1)
signal] or 62 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no-load.
I The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once.
I The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-477.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0285
Perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153”, EC-218.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1148 (BANK 1), P1168 (BANK 2) CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-477
SEF273X
Component Description
NHEC0532
The swirl control valve control vacuum check switch detects
vacuum signal to the swirl control valve, and sends “ON” or “OFF”
signal to the ECM.
When vacuum is supplied to the valve, the swirl control valve con-
trol vacuum check switch sends “OFF” signal to the ECM.
The swirl control valve control vacuum check switch is not used to
control the engine system, it is used for on board diagnosis.
SEF372X
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0533
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
SWL CON VC SW
I Engine speed: Idle
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C (122°F).
OFF
I Engine speed: Idle
I Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C (131°F).
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0535
Malfunction is detected when the swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch remains “OFF” under specified engine conditions.
Possible Cause
NHEC0536
I Harness or connectors
(Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch circuit is
open.)
I Hoses
(Hoses are clogged or connected incorrectly.)
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
I Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Component Description
EC-478
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0537
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform the test at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0537S01
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II and wait at
least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-481.
WITH GST
NHEC0537S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-479
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0538
MEC750C
SEF628XB
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-480
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0539
1 CHECK HOSES
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check hose for clogging or improper connection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.
2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Disconnect swirl control valve control vacuum check switch harness connector.
SEF273X
2. Check harness continuity between terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Joint connector-18
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control vacuum check switch and engine ground
© Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-481
4 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 55 and swirl control valve control vacuum check switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
3. Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF709X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-482
6 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF046Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF047Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-483
SEF280X
Description
NHEC0540
The malfunction information related to ABS/TCS control unit is
transferred through the line (LAN) from ABS/TCS control unit to
ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not
only for ABS/TCS control unit but also for ECM after the ABS/
TCS related repair.
DTC ERASING PROCEDURE FOR ABS/TCS RELATED
REPAIR
NHEC0540S01
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn it “ON”.
2) Connect CONSULT-II and select “ABS”.
3) Select “ABS” and touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4) Touch “ERASE”.
5) Touch “BACK” then erase malfunction code which has been
stored in the TCM or ECM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0542
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for the ABS/TCS
control unit. The MIL will not light up for ABS/TCS control unit.
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) ECM receives incorrect voltage from ABS/TCS
control unit continuously,
(Malfunction B) TCS operation (Fuel cut) continues for an abnor-
mally long time.
Possible Cause
NHEC0543
I ABS/TCS control unit
I TCS related parts (Refer to BR section.)
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0544
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC
cannot be confirmed, perform “Overall Function Check”, “Pro-
cedure for malfunction B”.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0544S01
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0544S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
EC-484
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-485.
Overall Function Check
NHEC0545
Use this procedure to check the overall function of ABS/TCS con-
trol unit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NHEC0545S01
1) Lift up driving wheels.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Place TCS OFF switch in “ON” position.
4) Drive vehicle with “D” position (OD “ON” or “OFF”) and check
engine running conditions as follows.
Engine speed (“D” position) Engine running condition
Idle Normal
More than 1,600 rpm Rough
5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-485.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0546
If the trouble is duplicated after “Procedure for malfunction
A”, perform “Procedure A”. If the trouble is duplicated after
“Procedure for malfunction B”, perform “Procedure B”.
PROCEDURE A
NHEC0546S01
Go to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE” of “TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES” in BR section.
PROCEDURE B
NHEC0546S02
1 CHECK DRIVING CONDITION
Ask a customer if he or she has driven the vehicle under abnormal condition such as:
I driving with front wheels slipping for a long time.
I driving with front wheels lifted up for a long time.
YesorNo
Yes © INSPECTION END (NO FAILURE)
No © Go to BR-154, “Poor Acceleration”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-485
Description
NHEC0547
This circuit line is used to control the smooth engine operation of
ABS/TCS during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged
between ECM and ABS/TCS control unit.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not
only in ABS/TCS control unit but also ECM after the ABS/TCS
related repair.
DTC ERASING PROCEDURE FOR ABS/TCS RELATED
REPAIR
NHEC0547S01
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn it “ON”.
2) Connect CONSULT-II and select “ABS”.
3) Select “ABS” and touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4) Touch “ERASE”.
5) Touch “BACK” then erase malfunction code which has been
stored in the TCM or ECM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0549
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for the ABS/TCS
communication line. The MIL will not light up for the ABS /TCS
communication line.
Malfunction is detected when ECM receives incorrect voltage from
ABS/TCS control unit continuously.
Possible Cause
NHEC0550
I Harness or connectors
(The communication line circuit between ECM and ABS/TCS
control unit is open or shorted.)
I ABS/TCS control unit
I Dead (Weak) battery
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0551
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0551S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
4) If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-488.
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
EC-486
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0552
MEC758C
SEF629XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
EC-487
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0553
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and ABS/TCS control unit harness connector.
SEC004C
SEF280X
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 114 and ABS/TCS control unit terminal 47.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E81, M15
I Harness connectors M47, F45
I Check harness for open or short between ECM and ABS/TCS control unit.
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-488
System Description
NHEC0554
COOLING FAN CONTROL
NHEC0554S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Cooling fan
control
Cooling fan relay(s)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Ignition switch Start signal
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refriger-
ant pressure and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
OPERATION
NHEC0554S02
SEF578XA
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0555
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
AIR COND SIG
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates)
ON
COOLING FAN
I After warming up engine, idle
the engine.
I Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
94°C (201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C
(219°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is
105°C (221°F) or more
HIGH
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
System Description
EC-489
On Board Diagnosis Logic
=NHEC0557
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
Malfunction is detected when cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat), cooling fan system does not
operate properly (Overheat) and engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method.
Possible Cause
NHEC0563
I Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
I Cooling fan
I Radiator hose
I Radiator
I Radiator cap
I Water pump
I Thermostat
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-505.
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the cool-
ant following the procedure in the MA-14, “Changing Engine
Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil.
1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a fill-
ing speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant
with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, “Anti-
freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
2) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no
water-flow noise is emitted.
SEF621W
SEF111X
Overall Function Check
NHEC0558
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape.
Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0558S01
1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-494.
2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-494.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-490
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0559
MEC759C
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-492
MEC879C
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-493
SEF630XB
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0560
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 4.
2 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
SEC006C
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF646X
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-500.)
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-494
3 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF111X
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-503.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-495
4 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
SEC006C
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
SEC163BA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-500.)
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-496
5 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
MEF613EA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-503.)
6 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm
2
, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following for leak.
I Hose
I Radiator
I Water pump (Refer to LC-11, “Water Pump”.)
© Repair or replace.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-497
8 CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.
SLC755A
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm
2
,9-14psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace radiator cap.
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
SLC343
Valve opening temperature:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-15, “Thermostat”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace thermostat.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-498
10 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
11 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-505.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-499
PROCEDURE A
=NHEC0560S01
1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF590X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Joint connector-8
I Joint connector-9
I 15A fuse
I 40A fusible links
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-500
3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
SEC007C
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-1 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-2 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-501
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1
Check continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.
SEF591X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relay.
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation.
SEF592X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-502
PROCEDURE B
NHEC0560S02
1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF593X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Joint connector-8
I Joint connector-9
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and joint connectors-8, -9
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and joint connectors-8, -9
© Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-2
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-3
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-503
4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 34 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, E17
I Joint connector-10
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3
Check continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.
SEF591X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relays.
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation.
SEF592X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-504
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
1. Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
NHEC0561
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 I Blocked radiator
I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille
I Blocked bumper
I Visual No blocking —
2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-11, “RECOM-
MENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.
3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and
radiator filler neck
See MA-14, “Changing
Engine Coolant”.
4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm
2
,9-14
psi) (Limit)
See LC-10, “System
Check”.
ON*
2
5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See LC-10, “System
Check”.
ON*
2
6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be
hot
See LC-15, “Thermostat”
and LC-17, “Radiator”.
ON*
1
7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-489).
OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemi-
cal tester 4 Gas ana-
lyzer
Negative —
ON*
3
9 I Coolant temperature
gauge
I Visual Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
—
I Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
I Visual No overflow during driv-
ing and idling
See MA-14, “Changing
Engine Coolant”.
OFF*
4
10 I Coolant return from
reservoir tank to radia-
tor
I Visual Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
See MA-13, “ENGINE
MAINTENANCE”.
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler
gauge
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi-
mum distortion (warping)
See EM-41, “Inspection”.
12 I Cylinder block and pis-
tons
I Visual No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
See EM-61, “Inspection”.
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to LC-22, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-505
Component Description
NHEC0286
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
NHEC0286S01
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
SEF274X
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0288
Malfunction is detected when the ignition signal in the primary cir-
cuit is not sent to ECM during engine cranking or running.
Possible Cause
NHEC0572
I Harness or connectors (The ignition primary circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
I Condenser
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0289
NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I If DTC P1320 is displayed with DTC P0335, P0340, P1335
or P1336, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335,
P0340, P1335 or P1336 first. Refer to EC-343, EC-351,
EC-517 or EC-523.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
EC-506
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0289S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to
“START” for at least 5 seconds.)
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-511.
WITH GST
NHEC0289S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-507
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0290
MEC819C
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
EC-508
MEC752C
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-509
MEC753C
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-510
SEF860Y
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0291
1 CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
YesorNo
Yes (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 12.
No © GO TO 3.
2 SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop.
SEF070Y
© GO TO 12.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-511
3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF366X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Go to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-145.
4 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
SEF275X
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF367X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 5.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-512
5 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEC003C
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F18, E15
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF368X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-513
9 CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace ECM relay.
10 CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
11 CHECK CONDENSER
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
SEF369X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace condenser.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-514
12 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
SEF274X
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF370X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.
13 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F18.
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.
14 CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-515
15 CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
16 CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Check resistance between ignition coil terminals 2 and 3.
SEF371X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-516
SEF253P
Component Description
NHEC0573
The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan
(upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead
Center) signal (120° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the
crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the
sensor also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal
(120° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0574
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CKPS·RPM (POS) I Tachometer: Connect
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
Almost the same speed as the
CONSULT-II value.
ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0576
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) 120° signal is not entered to ECM for the first few
seconds during engine cranking,
(Malfunction B) 120° signal is not entered to ECM during engine
running,
(Malfunction C) 120° signal cycle excessively changes during
engine running.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NHEC0576S01
When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
circuit
Compression TDC signal (120° signal) is controlled by camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
signal and crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal. Ignition timing will be delayed 0° to 2°.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Component Description
EC-517
Possible Cause
NHEC0577
I Harness or connectors
(The crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
I Starting system circuit (Refer to SC section.)
I Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0578
NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
SEF013Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NHEC0578S01
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0578S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-520.
With GST
NHEC0578S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C
NHEC0578S02
With CONSULT-II
NHEC0578S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-520.
With GST
NHEC0578S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Possible Cause
EC-518
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0579
MEC419D
SEF861Y
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Wiring Diagram
EC-519
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0580
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK CKPS (REF) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (REF) harness connector.
SEF591PA
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 65, 75 and CKPS (REF) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (REF) and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-520
4 CHECK CKPS (REF) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (REF) terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (REF) and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
6 CHECK CKPS (REF)-I
1. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
2. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping.
SEF585P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
7 CHECK CKPS (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2.
SEF350X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-521
8 CHECK CKPS (REF) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect harness connectors F43, F191.
3. Check harness continuity between harness connector F43 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 9.
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Joint connector-18
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F43 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-522
SEF254P
Component Description
NHEC0292
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0581
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CKPS·RPM (POS) I Tachometer: Connect
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
Almost the same speed as the
CONSULT-II value.
ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0294
Malfunction is detected when chipping of the signal plate (flywheel
or drive plate) gear tooth (cog) is detected by the ECM.
Possible Cause
NHEC0582
I Harness or connectors
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Signal plate (Drive plate/Flywheel)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Component Description
EC-523
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0295
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V.
SEF058Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0295S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 70 seconds at idle speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-526.
WITH GST
NHEC0295S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-524
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0296
MEC812C
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Wiring Diagram
EC-525
SEF856Y
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0297
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCERWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
© GO TO 2.
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-526
2 CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
SEF511WB
2. Check voltage between harness connector F25 terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF323X
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F25, F171
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-527
5 CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector F25 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.
SEF367Q
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector F171 terminals as follows.
MTBL0352
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK CKPS (POS) INSTALLATION
Check that CKPS (POS) and HO2S1 (B2) harness clamp are installed correctly as shown below.
SEM222FC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Install CKPS (POS) correctly.
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-528
8 CHECK IMPROPER INSTALLATION
1. Loosen and retighten the fixing bolt of the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-524 again.
Is a 1st trip DTC P1336 detected?
Yes © GO TO 9.
No © INSPECTION END
9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
SEF587P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
10 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SEF324X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-529
11 CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © GO TO 12.
12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F25, F171
I Joint connector-18
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F25 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
13 CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate (flywheel or drive plate) gear tooth (cog).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace the signal plate (flywheel or drive plate).
14 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-530
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0316
NOTE:
If DTC P1440 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagno-
sis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-564.)
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using of vapor
pressure in the fuel tank.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP
purge line. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve will then be opened
to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP control system pressure
sensor can now monitor the pressure inside the fuel tank.
If pressure increases, the ECM will check for leaks in the line
between the vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve.
SEF323U
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a leak,
EVAP control system does not operate properly.
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replace-
ment. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Possible Cause
NHEC0587
I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
I Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
I Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
I Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
I EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
I EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-531
I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
I Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor
I Loose or disconnected rubber tube
I EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
I Absolute pressure sensor
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
I O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or dam-
aged.
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water.
I Fuel level sensor and the circuit
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I Refueling control valve
I ORVR system leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0317
Refer to “P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK)
(NEGATIVE PRESSURE)”, EC-362.
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0643
Refer to “P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK)
(NEGATIVE PRESSURE)”, EC-362.
DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
EC-532
Description
NHEC0319
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NHEC0319S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM
function
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
EVAP can-
ister purge
flow control
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Throttle position switch Closed throttle position
Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front)
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by consider-
ing various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
SEF337U
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0319S02
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0320
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PURG VOL C/V
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0%
2,000 rpm —
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
EC-533
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0322
Malfunction is detected when the canister purge flow is detected
during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed.
Possible Cause
NHEC0588
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve
is stuck open.)
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I EVAP canister
I Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0323
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-534
SEF205Y
SEF206Y
SEF237Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0323S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYS-
TEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Touch “START”.
6) Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II
changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take for approximately 10
seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-537.
WITH GST
NHEC0323S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-537.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-535
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0324
MEC741C
SEF858Y
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-536
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0325
1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF266X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and engine ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
SEF333X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-537
4 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
SEF268X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair it.
5 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-538
6 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 8.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-539
7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-540
9 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
10 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF337X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-541
11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © GO TO 12.
12 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform procedure 9 again.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-542
13 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
SEF596U
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 14.
No © GO TO 17.
14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
15 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separater for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-543
16 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items2-4,replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Clean or replace water separator.
17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-544
SEF032W
SEF267X
Component Description
NHEC0326
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is ener-
gized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The abil-
ity to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0327
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0329
Malfunction is detected when EVAP canister vent control valve
remains closed under specified driving conditions.
Possible Cause
NHEC0589
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
I Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Component Description
EC-545
SEF201Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0330
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0330S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50 MPH)
for a maximum of 15 minutes.
NOTE:
If a malfunction exists, NG result may be displayed quicker.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-548.
WITH GST
NHEC0330S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-546
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0331
MEC742C
SEF668XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Wiring Diagram
EC-547
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0332
1 CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
SEF267X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items2-4,replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Clean or replace water separator.
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-548
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF337X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-549
5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform the procedure 4 again.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
6 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
SEF596U
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 7.
No © GO TO 9.
7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
9 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair it.
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-550
10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF268X
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-551
11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-552
System Description
NHEC0333
NOTE:
If DTC P1447 is displayed with P0510, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510 first. (See EC-438.)
SEF323U
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0334
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output volt-
age indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not,
a fault is determined.
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system does not oper-
ate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake mani-
fold and EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Possible Cause
NHEC0590
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck
closed
I EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
I Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
I Blocked rubber tube
I Cracked EVAP canister
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit
I Closed throttle position switch
I Blocked purge port
I EVAP canister vent control valve
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
System Description
EC-553
SEF207Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0335
SEF208Y
SEF238Y
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0335S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
4) Select “PURG FLOW P1447” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in
“DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take at least 35 seconds.)
Selector lever Suitable position
Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 8.1 msec
Engine coolant temperature 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-556.
SEF355X
Overall Function Check
NHEC0336
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0336S01
1) Lift up drive wheels.
2) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-554
5) Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 84 (EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6) Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle
speed and note it.
7) Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch ON
Steering wheel Fully turned
Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position Any position other than “P”, “N” or “R”
8) Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays
0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for
at least 1 second.
9) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-556.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-555
Diagnostic Procedure
=NHEC0337
1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 3.
NG © Replace EVAP canister.
2 CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and
install vacuum gauge.
SEC022C
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
SEF012Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 4.
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-556
3 CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and
install vacuum gauge.
SEC022C
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle.
Vacuum should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 6.
NG © Repair it.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-557
5 CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B.
SEF367U
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
3. Check that air flows freely.
SEF368U
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
6 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF985Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-558
7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair it.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-559
9 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF268X
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P0450, EC-391.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
11 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
12 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF337X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-560
13 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14.
14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 13 again.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 15.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
© GO TO 16.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-561
15 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions.
Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
MTBL0355
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.
16 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
5. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
SEC010C
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-562
17 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-109.
MTBL0595
Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 18.
No © Replace throttle position switch.
18 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-36.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace it.
19 CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
© GO TO 20.
20 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-563
SEF032W
SEF267X
Component Description
NHEC0338
NOTE:
If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, perform trouble diagno-
sis for DTC P1448 first.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is ener-
gized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The abil-
ity to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0339
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0341
Malfunction is detected when EVAP canister vent control valve
remains opened under specified driving conditions.
Possible Cause
NHEC0591
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I EVAP control system pressure sensor and circuit
I Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water.
I Vacuum cut valve
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Component Description
EC-564
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0342
NOTE:
I If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440 or P1440, perform
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
SEF565X
SEF566X
SEF567X
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0342S01
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
I Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to
86°F).
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range
displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-109.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, go to the following step.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
7) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds, then turn “ON”.
8) Disconnect hose from water separator.
9) Select “VENT CONTROL/V” of “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
10) Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately.
SEF223Y
11) Make sure the following.
Condition
VENT CONTROL/V
Air passage continuity
between A and B
ON No
OFF Yes
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-568.
If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440, EC-364.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-565
AEC783A
Overall Function Check
NHEC0343
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP can-
ister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0343S01
1) Disconnect hose from water separator.
2) Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connec-
tor.
3) Verify the following.
Condition Air passage continuity
12V direct current supply between ter-
minals 1 and 2
No
No supply Yes
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-568.
If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440, EC-364.
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Overall Function Check
EC-566
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0344
MEC742C
SEF668XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Wiring Diagram
EC-567
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0345
1 CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
SEF267X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF337X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-568
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 3 again.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-569
5 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve.
3. Check vacuum cut valve as follows:
SEF379Q
a. Plug port C and D with fingers.
b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
e. Open port C and D.
f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C.
g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace vacuum cut valve.
6 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
SEF596U
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 7.
No © GO TO 9.
7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-570
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
9 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair it.
10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF268X
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-571
11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-572
SEF614X
Component Description
NHEC0632
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NHEC0633
ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor.
One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel
level sensor ground circuit.
This diagnosis indicates the latter to detect open circuit malfunc-
tion. Malfunction is detected when a high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
NHEC0634
I Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0635
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
SEF195Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0635S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-575.
WITH GST
NHEC0635S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Component Description
EC-573
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0640
MEC148D
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Wiring Diagram
EC-574
Diagnostic Procedure
=NHEC0641
1 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Check the following.
I Harness connectors F44, M46
I Harness connectors M110, B43
I Harness for open and short between ECM and body ground
© Replace open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-162, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
4 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
OK or NG
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-575
SEF278X
Description
=NHEC0346
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0346S01
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NHEC0346S02
SEF323U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0347
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VC/V BYPASS/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0349
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Description
EC-576
Possible Cause
NHEC0592
I Harness or connectors
(The vacuum cut valve bypass valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0350
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle speed.
SEF058Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0350S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-579.
WITH GST
NHEC0350S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause
EC-577
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0351
MEC149D
SEF634XC
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-578
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0352
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF014Z
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-579
3 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALUE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.
SEF278X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF356X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M5, B1
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
5 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 39 and vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-580
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness disconnected connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF016Z
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF358X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-581
SEF278X
Description
NHEC0353
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0353S01
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NHEC0353S02
SEF323U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0354
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VC/V BYPASS/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0356
Malfunction is detected when vacuum cut valve bypass valve does
not operate properly.
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Description
EC-582
Possible Cause
NHEC0593
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
I Vacuum cut valve
I Bypass hoses for clogging
I EVAP control system pressure sensor and circuit
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I Hose between fuel tank and vacuum cut valve clogged
I Hose between vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister clogged
I EVAP canister
I EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging
SEF210Y
SEF211Y
SEF239Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0357
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5 to 30°C (41 to 86°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0357S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
5) Select “VC CUT/V BP/V P1491” of “EVAP SYSTEM” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Touch “START”.
7) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take at least 30 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,000 rpm
Selector lever Suitable position
Vehicle speed 35 - 120 km/h (22 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 8.1 msec
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 3.
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-586.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Possible Cause
EC-583
SEF530Q
Overall Function Check
NHEC0358
Use this procedure to check the overall function of vacuum cut
valve bypass valve. During this check, the 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0358S01
1) Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve
as an assembly.
2) Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from
port B.
3) Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from
port A.
4) Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow
out of port A.
5) Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
6) Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
7) Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
8) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-586.
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Overall Function Check
EC-584
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0359
MEC149D
SEF634XC
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-585
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0360
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly.
3. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
4. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
5. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
7. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and touch “ON”.
8. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
9. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
SEF017Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 5.
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-586
3 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly.
3. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
4. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
5. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
6. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.
7. Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
8. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
9. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
SEF914U
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 7.
4 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging or disconnection.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair it.
5 CHECK EVAP PURGE PORT
Check EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Clean EVAP purge port.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-587
6 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.
AEC630A
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP canister.
7 CHECK BYPASS HOSE
Check bypass hoses for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair or replace hoses.
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-588
8 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF016Z
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF358X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-589
9 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE
Check vacuum cut valve as follows:
SEF379Q
a. Plug port C and D with fingers.
b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
e. Open port C and D.
f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C.
g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace vacuum cut valve.
10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Repair or replace.
11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF268X
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-590
12 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
13 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-591
14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF337X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
15 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness disconnected connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEF991Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © GO TO 16.
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-592
16 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform the Test No. 15 again.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-593
Component Description
NHEC0361
The malfunction information related to A/T (Automatic Transmission) is transferred through the line (circuit)
from TCM (Transmission control module) to ECM. Therefore, be sure to erase the malfunction information such
as DTC not only in TCM (Transmission control module) but also ECM after the A/T related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0363
Malfunction is detected when an incorrect signal from TCM (Trans-
mission control module) is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
NHEC0594
I Harness or connectors
[The communication line circuit between ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) is open or shorted.]
I Dead (Weak) battery
I TCM (Transmission control module)
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0364
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0364S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-596.
WITH GST
NHEC0364S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Component Description
EC-594
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0365
MEC796C
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
EC-595
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0366
1 CHECK A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.
SEC004C
SEF271X
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 60 and TCM terminal 15. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-596
AEC877A
Component Description
NHEC0367
When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral
position (PNP) switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the
“ON” signal) exists.
For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly
also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever
position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0368
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON
Except above OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NHEC0370
Malfunction is detected when the signal of the park/neutral position
(PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and
driving.
Possible Cause
NHEC0595
I Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or
shorted.]
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NHEC0371
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Component Description
EC-597
SEF212Y
SEF213Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NHEC0371S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
“N” and “P” position ON
Except the above position OFF
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-600.
If OK, go to following step.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,800 - 2,600 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2 - 10 msec
VHCL SPEED SE 70 - 100 km/h (43 - 62 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-600.
SEF359X
Overall Function Check
NHEC0372
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NHEC0372S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Check voltage between ECM terminal 44 and body ground
under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known good data)
“P” and “N” position Approx. 0
Except the above position Battery voltage
3) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-600.
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-598
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0373
MEC822C
SEF973XA
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-599
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0374
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
SEF279X
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F10, F151
I Harness for open or short between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F10, F151
I Harness for open or short between ECM and park/neutral position (PNP) switch
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Refer to AT-105, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-600
Description
NHEC0596
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NHEC0596S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
VIAS con-
trol
VIAS control solenoid valve
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Closed throttle position Throttle valve idle position
Ignition switch Start signal
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
SEF599X
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power
valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port
length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collec-
tor’s suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port
provides increased air intake which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is
running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold
vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore opens the
power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the
length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder.
This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with
reduced suction resistance under high speeds.
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description
EC-602
SEF600X
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NHEC0596S02
Power Valve
NHEC0596S0201
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used
to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control
system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the
power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge
tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve.
SEF288X
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
NHEC0596S0202
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description (Cont’d)
EC-603
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0597
MEC768C
SEF636XB
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-604
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0598
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
SEF051Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
SEF052Y
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-605
2 CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF288X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF603X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I 15A fuse
I Harness continuity between fuse and VIAS control solenoid valve
© Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-606
5 RETEST OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform Test No. 1 again.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 6.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
OK or NG
OK © Replace VIAS control solenoid valve as intake manifold collector assembly.
NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-607
SEF812J
Component Description
NHEC0383
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0384
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
INJ PULSE-B2
INJ PULSE-B1
I Engine: After warming up
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load
Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL ditto
Idle 2.0 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm 1.4 - 2.6 msec
INJECTOR
Component Description
EC-608
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0386
MEC823C
SEF862Y
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
INJECTOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-609
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0387
1 INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to “START”.
Is any cylinder ignited?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 3.
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-610
3 CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect injector harness connectors (bank 2) and harness connectors F43, F191 (bank 1).
SEF276X
SEF281XA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground, harness connector F43 terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II
or tester.
SEF897X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F43 and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-611
5 CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 103, 104, 107, harness connector F191 termi-
nals 6, 2, 1 and ECM terminals 101, 105, 102. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F191 and ECM
I Harness for open or short between ECM and injector
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT (RIGHT BANK)
1. Remove intake manifold collector.
2. Disconnect injector harness connectors (Right bank).
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0359
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
SEF964XA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace injector.
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-612
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0388
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF
START SIGNAL
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
EC-614
Wiring Diagram
=NHEC0390
MEC150D
SEF638XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
START SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
EC-615
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0391
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF072Y
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 4.
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF362X
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn it to “START”.
Does starter motor operate?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Refer to SC-10, “STARTING SYSTEM”.
START SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-616
5 CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect 10A fuse.
3. Check if 10A fuse is OK.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace 10A fuse.
6 CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect ignition switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and fuse block, ignition switch and fuse block. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connectors M17, E83
I Harness for open or short between ignition switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
START SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-617
System Description
NHEC0392
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Fuel pump
control
Fuel pump relayCrankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Ignition switch Start signal
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a 120° signal from the crankshaft position sensor (REF), it knows that the
engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the 120° signal is not received when the ignition switch
is on, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving
safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn
controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
SEF605X
Component Description
NHEC0393
The fuel pump with a fuel damper is an in-tank type (the pump and
damper are located in the fuel tank).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0394
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
FUEL PUMP RLY
I Ignition switch is turned to ON. (Operates for 1 second.)
I Engine running and cranking
ON
Except as shown above OFF
FUEL PUMP
System Description
EC-618
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0396
MEC935C
SEF639XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram
EC-619
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0397
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
SEC013C
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay.
SEF284X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF898X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-620
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Fuse block (J/B) connector B5
I 10A fuse
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay
© Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
SEF263X
3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump terminal 3 and body ground, fuel pump terminal 1 and fuel pump relay
terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and fuel pump
I Harness for open or short between fuel pump and body ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 28 and fuel pump relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-621
8 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect fuel pump relay, fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Turn fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and check operating sound.
SEF073Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEF608X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace fuel pump relay.
9 CHECK FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 3.
SEF609X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace fuel pump.
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-622
System Description
NHEC0599
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
ECM func-
tion
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Engine
mount con-
trol
Electronic controlled engine
mount
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to
the engine speed and the vehicle speed. The control system has
2-step control [soft/hard].
Vehicle condition Engine mount control
Idle (with vehicle stopped) Soft
Driving Hard
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0600
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENGINE MOUNT I Engine: Running
Idle “IDLE”
2,000 rpm “TRVL”
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
System Description
EC-624
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0602
MEC151D
SEF640XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Wiring Diagram
EC-625
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0603
1 CHECK THE OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. After warming up engine, run it at idle speed.
2. Shift selector lever to “D” range while depressing the brake pedal and pulling the parking brake control lever.
3. Perform “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and check that the body vibration changes
according to switching the condition (With vehicle stopped).
SEF074Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. After warming up engine, run it at idle speed.
2. Shift selector lever to “D” range while depressing the brake pedal and pulling the parking brake control lever.
3. Disconnect front or rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector when engine speed is more than 1,000
rpm.
Radiator cap
Front electronic controlled
engine mount harness connector
Battery
Rear electronic controlled
engine mount harness connector
View with intake air duct removed
SEF285XA
4. When returning engine speed to idle speed, check that the body vibration increases, compared with the condition of the
above step 2 (With vehicle stopped).
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-626
2 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect front or rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector.
3. Check voltage between electronic controlled engine mount terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF899X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between electronic controlled engine mount and battery
© Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electronic controlled engine mount terminal 1, ECM terminal
50 and electronic controlled engine mount terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
5 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Visually check front and rear electronic controlled engine mount.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace front or rear engine mount assembly.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-627
SEF286X
Component Description
NHEC0398
The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
adjust for the increased load.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NHEC0399
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PW/ST SIGNAL
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Steering wheel in neutral position
(forward direction)
OFF
The steering wheel is fully turned. ON
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Component Description
EC-628
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0401
MEC765C
SEF641XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-629
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0402
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF054Y
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 4.
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 47 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF363X
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 4.
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-630
4 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.
SEF286X
3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 47 and power steering oil pressure switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine.
2. Check continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
SEF364X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace power steering oil pressure switch.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-631
SEF287X
Description
NHEC0636
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan sys-
tem.
SEF099XA
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Description
EC-633
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0637
MEC829C
SEF643XC
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-634
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0638
1 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 81 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC014C
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF287X
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF618X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-635
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
© Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission control module) and refrigerant pressure sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 81 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to HA-80, “Refrigerant pressure sensor”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-636
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0604
FOR USA
NHEC0604S01
MEC398D
SEF642XB
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
EC-637
FOR CANADA
NHEC0604S02
MEC399D
SEF642XB
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-638
Diagnostic Procedure
NHEC0605
1 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF610X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF611X
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 7.
3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch.
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
YesorNo
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Refer to EL-198, “Rear Window Defogger”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-639
4 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay terminals 5 and 7.
SEF612X
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors B1, M5
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Diode M35
I Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defigger relay
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-144.
© INSPECTION END
7 CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON” at 1st position with high beam.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Refer to EL-34, “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” or “EL-60, “HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) —
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM”.
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-640
8 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect headlamp RH relay (Models with xenon headlamp), headlamp LH relay (Models without xenon headlamp).
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and headlamp RH relay terminal 7 or headlamp LH relay terminal
5 under the following conditions.
SEF900X
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.
9 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect daytime light control unit harness connector (Models for Canada).
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and daytime light control unit terminal 7 under the following condi-
tions.
SEF901X
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.
10 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E81, M15
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Diode E79
I Harness for open and short between ECM and headlamp RH relay, headlamp LH relay or daytime light control unit
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-641
Wiring Diagram
NHEC0407
MEC154D
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
Wiring Diagram
EC-643
Fuel Pressure Regulator
NHEC0408
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm
2
, psi)
Vacuum hose is connected. Approximately 235 (2.4, 34)
Vacuum hose is disconnected. Approximately 294 (3.0, 43)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
NHEC0409
Target idle speed*1 No-load*2 (in “P” or N” position) 700±50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON In “P” or N” position 825 rpm or more
Ignition timing*1 In “P” or N” position 15°±5° BTDC
Throttle position sensor idle position 0.15 - 0.85V
*1: Throttle position sensor harness connector connected
*2: Under the following conditions:
I Air conditioner switch: OFF
I Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
I Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor
NHEC0411
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8*V
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
NHEC0412
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (Front)
NHEC0414
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω
Fuel Pump
NHEC0415
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 0.2 - 5.0Ω
IACV-AAC Valve
NHEC0416
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Approximately 22Ω
Injector
NHEC0417
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 13.5 - 17.5Ω
Resistor
NHEC0418
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 2.2 kΩ
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure Regulator
EC-644
Throttle Position Sensor
NHEC0419
Throttle valve conditions
Voltage
(at normal operating temperature,
engine off, ignition switch ON,
throttle opener disengaged)
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85V
Partially open Between (a) and (b)
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7V
Calculated Load Value
NHEC0420
Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
At idle 14.0 - 33.0
At 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
NHEC0421
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (Rear)
NHEC0422
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF)
NHEC0423
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 470 - 570Ω
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
NHEC0424
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
NHEC0639
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]
HITACHI make 1,440 - 1,760Ω
MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550Ω
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Throttle Position Sensor
EC-645
NOTES
